MINI F60 Owners Manual

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI COUNTRYMAN.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C389 - II/21
WELCOME TO MINI.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to
enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information.............................................................................................................................. 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering.................................................................................................................................. 16
Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................20
On the road............................................................................................................................ 24
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32
Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36
Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 44
General settings................................................................................................................... 48
Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................60
CONTROLS
Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 62
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel.................................................................................. 86
Transporting children safely............................................................................................ 98
Driving..................................................................................................................................104
Displays................................................................................................................................ 129
Lights.................................................................................................................................... 152
Safety.....................................................................................................................................158
Driving stability control systems.................................................................................182
Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 187
Climate control...................................................................................................................208
4
Interior equipment............................................................................................................218
Storage compartments.....................................................................................................229
Cargo area............................................................................................................................232
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 240
Reducing fuel consumption........................................................................................... 245
MOBILITY
Refueling..............................................................................................................................252
Fuel........................................................................................................................................ 254
Wheels and tires................................................................................................................256
Engine compartment........................................................................................................276
Engine oil.............................................................................................................................279
Coolant..................................................................................................................................283
Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 285
Replacing components.................................................................................................... 287
Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 292
Care........................................................................................................................................300
REFERENCE
Technical data.................................................................................................................... 306
Appendix..............................................................................................................................309
Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................310
© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 II/21, 03 21 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Internet
Vehicle information and general informa-
Orientation tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-
ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
The fastest way to find information on a
particular topic is by using the index.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
An initial overview of the vehicle is pro- vehicle
vided in the first chapter.
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
Updates made after the editorial describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
deadline can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, ditional information, refer to page 60.
differences may exist between the printed
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's MINI Motorer’s Guide app
Manual in the vehicle.
The app specifically describes features and
Notes on updates can be found in the ap- functions found in the vehicle. The app can
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for be displayed on smartphones and tablets.
the vehicle.
MINI Motorer’s Guide Web
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-
Entertainment, Communication ble information for the selected vehicle. If
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- possible, only equipment and functions that
tainment, and Communication can be ob- are actually installed in the vehicle will be
tained as a printed book from the service explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-
center. played in any current browser.
The topics are also discussed in the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Symbols and displays
Additional sources of informa- Symbols in the Owner's Manual
tion
Icon Meaning
Service center Precautions that must be followed
A service center will be glad to answer in order to avoid the possibility of
questions at any time. injury to yourself and to others as
well as serious damage to the
vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
6
Information NOTES
Icon Meaning This also applies to safety-related functions

and systems.
"..." Control Display texts used to select
When using these functions and systems,
individual functions.
the applicable laws and regulations must be
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the observed.
voice activation system. For any options and equipment not descri-
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the
activation system. Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-
Action steps swer any questions that you may have
about the features and options applicable to
Action steps to be carried out are presented your vehicle.
as a numbered list. The steps must be car-
ried out in the defined order.
1. First action step. Status of the Owner's Manual
2. Second action step.
Basic information
Enumerations The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
Enumerations without mandatory order or policy of constant development that is con-
alternative possibilities are presented as a ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue
list with bullet points. to embody the highest quality and safety
standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-
– First possibility.
tures described in this Owner's Manual may
– Second possibility. differ from those in your vehicle.
Icons on vehicle components Updates made after the editorial

This symbol on a vehicle component deadline
indicates that further information on the Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
component is available in the Owner's differences may exist between the printed
Manual. Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
Vehicle features and options pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for
the vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all models
and all standard, country-specific and op-
tional equipment that is offered in the For Your Own Safety
model series. Therefore, this Owner's
Manual also describes and illustrates fea-
tures and functions that are not available in Manufacturer
a vehicle, for example because of the se- The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-
lected optional features or the country-spe- sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft,
cific version. BMW AG.
7
NOTES Information
Intended use If work is performed improperly, for in-

Heed the following when using the vehicle: stance maintenance and repair, there is a
risk of subsequent damage and related
– Owner's Manual. safety risks.
– Information on the vehicle. Do not re- Improperly performed work on the vehicle
move stickers. paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of
– Technical vehicle data. components, e.g., the radar sensors, and
– The traffic, speed, and safety laws where thereby result in a safety risk.
the vehicle is driven.
– Vehicle documents and statutory docu- Parts and accessories
ments. The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends the use of parts and accessory prod-
Warranty ucts approved by the manufacturer of the
MINI.
Your vehicle is technically configured for
the operating conditions and registration Approved parts and accessories, and advice
requirements applying in the country of on their use and installation are available
first delivery, also known as homologation. from a MINI dealer's service center.
If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ- MINI parts and accessories were tested by
ent country it might be necessary to adapt the manufacturer of the MINI for their
your vehicle to potentially differing operat- safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.
ing conditions and registration require- The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with genuine MINI parts and accessories.
the homologation requirements in a certain
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
country you may not be able to lodge war-
evaluate whether each individual product
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further
from another manufacturer can be used
information on warranty is available from a
with MINI vehicles without presenting a
service center.
safety hazard, even if a country-specific of-
ficial approval was issued. The manufac-
Maintenance and repairs turer of your vehicle does not evaluate
Advanced technology, for instance the use whether these products are suitable for
of modern materials and high-performance MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
electronics, requires suitable maintenance
and repair work. California Proposition 65 Warning
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- For vehicles sold in California, the law re-
mends that you entrust corresponding pro- quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the
cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If following warning:
you choose to use another service facility,
the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends use of a facility that performs work, Warning
e.g., maintenance and repair, according to Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-
MINI specifications with properly trained tomobile components and parts, including
personnel, referred to in the Owner's components found in the interior furnish-
Manual as "another qualified service center ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-
or repair shop". cals known to the State of California to
8
Information NOTES
cause cancer and birth defects and repro- – Federal Emissions System Defect War-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids ranty.
contained in vehicles and certain products – Federal Emissions Performance War-
of component wear contain or emit chemi- ranty.
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other re- – California Emission Control System Lim-
productive harm. Battery posts, terminals ited Warranty.
and related accessories contain lead and Detailed information about these warranties
lead compounds. Batteries also contain is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-
other chemicals known to the State of Cali- mation Booklet for US models or in the War-
fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-
after handling. Used engine oil contains dian models.
chemicals that have caused cancer in labo- Your vehicle has been specifically adapted
ratory animals. Always protect your skin and designed to meet the particular operat-
by washing thoroughly with soap and wa- ing conditions and homologation require-
ter. For more information go to ments in your country and continental re-
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- gion in order to deliver the full driving
hicle. pleasure while the vehicle is operated under
those conditions. If you wish to operate
your vehicle in another country or region,
Warning you may be required to adapt your vehicle
to meet different prevailing operating con-
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
ditions and homologation requirements.
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
You should also be aware of any applicable
vehicle can expose you to chemicals in-
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
country or region. In such case, please con-
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
tact Customer Relations for further informa-
the State of California to cause cancer and
tion.
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-
haust, do not idle the engine except as Maintenance
necessary, service your vehicle in a well- Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain
ventilated area and wear gloves or wash the road safety, operational reliability and
your hands frequently when servicing the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
your vehicle. For more information go to Specifications for maintenance measures:
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
– MINI Maintenance system.
hicle.
– Service and Warranty Information Book-
let for US models.
Service and warranty – Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
We recommend that you read this publica- Canadian models.
tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by If the vehicle is not maintained or is im-
the following warranties: properly maintained, this could result in se-
– New Vehicle Limited Warranty. rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim-
– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
ited Warranty.
9
NOTES Information
Refer to section on engine oil change re- – Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,
garding recommended service intervals for rain sensor signals.
oil changes. The processed data is only processed in the
vehicle itself and generally volatile. The
data is not stored beyond the operating pe-
Data memory riod.
Electronic components, e.g. control units
General information and ignition keys, contain components for
Electronic control devices are installed in storing technical information. Information
the vehicle. Electronic control units process about the vehicle condition, component us-
data they receive from vehicle sensors, self- age, maintenance recommendations, events
generate or exchange with each other. Some or faults can be stored temporarily or per-
control units are necessary for the vehicle manently.
to function safely or provide assistance dur- This information generally records the state
ing driving, for instance driver assistance of a component, a module, a system, or the
systems. Furthermore, control units facili- environment, for instance:
tate comfort or infotainment functions. – Operating states of system components,
Information about stored or exchanged data for instance, fill levels, tire inflation
can be requested from the manufacturer of pressure, battery status.
the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam- – Malfunctions and faults in important
ple. system components, for instance lights
and brakes.
Personal reference – Responses by the vehicle to special sit-
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi- uations such as airbag deployment or
cle identification number. Depending on the engagement of the driving stability con-
country, the vehicle owner can be identified trol systems.
with the vehicle identification number, li- – Information on vehicle-damaging
cense plate and corresponding authorities. events.
In addition, there are other options to track
The data is required to perform the control
data collected in the vehicle to the driver or
unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves
vehicle owner, for instance via utilized
to recognize and correct malfunctions, and
services.
helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize
vehicle functions.
Operating data in the vehicle
The majority of this data is stored tempora-
Control units process data to operate the ve- rily and is only processed within the vehicle
hicle. itself. In some circumstances the vehicle
For example, this includes: may store some data for an additional but
– Status messages for the vehicle and its limited period of time.
individual components, e.g., wheel rota- When servicing, for instance during repairs,
tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration, service processes, warranty cases, and qual-
lateral acceleration, engaged safety belt ity assurance measures, this technical infor-
indicator. mation can be read out from the vehicle to-
10
Information NOTES
gether with the vehicle identification – Data on the use of Internet services.
number. This data can be stored locally in the vehicle
A dealer’s service center or another quali- or is found on a device that has been con-
fied service center or repair shop can read nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,
out the information. The socket for OBD On- USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is
board Diagnosis required by law in the ve- stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at
hicle is used to read out the data. any time.
The data is collected, processed, and used This data is only transmitted to third parties
by the relevant organizations in the service upon personal request as part of the use of
network. The data documents technical con- online services. The transmission depends
ditions of the vehicle, which can be used to on the selected settings for the use of the
determine vehicle maintenance status, and services.
facilitate quality improvement.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can Incorporation of mobile devices
be reset when a dealer’s service center or Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo-
another qualified service center or repair bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-
shop performs repair or servicing work. stance smartphones, can be controlled via
the vehicle control elements.
Data entry and data transfer into The sound and picture from the mobile de-
the vehicle vice can be played back and displayed
through the multimedia system. Certain in-
General information formation is transferred to the mobile de-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, com- vice at the same time. Depending on the
fort and individual settings can be stored in type of incorporation, this includes, for in-
the vehicle and modified or reset at any stance position data and other general vehi-
time. cle information. This optimizes the way in
which selected apps, for instance navigation
For example, this includes: or music playback, work.
– Settings for the seat and steering wheel There is no further interaction between the
positions. mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac-
– Chassis and climate control settings. tive access to vehicle data.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the How the data will be processed further is
entertainment and communication system determined by the provider of the particular
of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone. app being used. The extent of the possible
This includes the following depending on settings depends on the respective app and
the respective equipment: the operating system of the mobile device.
– Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated Services
multimedia system.
– Address book data for use in conjunc-
General information
tion with an integrated hands-free sys- If the vehicle has a wireless network con-
tem or an integrated navigation system. nection, this enables data to be exchanged
between the vehicle and other systems. The
– Entered navigation destinations.
wireless network connection is realized via
11
NOTES Information
an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit Event Data Recorder EDR

or via personal mobile devices brought into
the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This
wireless network connection enables 'online This vehicle is equipped with an event data
functions' to be used. These include online recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR
services and apps supplied by the vehicle is to record, in certain crash or near crash-
manufacturer or by other providers. like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
Services from the vehicle will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to
manufacturer record data related to vehicle dynamics and
Where online services from the vehicle safety systems for a short period of time,
manufacturer are concerned, the corre- typically 30 seconds or less.
sponding functions are described in the ap- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
propriate place, for instance the Owner's cord such data as:
Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele-
vant legal information pertaining to data – How various systems in your vehicle
protection may also be found on the manu- were operating.
facturer’s website. Personal data may be – Whether or not the driver and passen-
used to perform online services. Data is ex- ger safety belts were fastened.
changed over a secure connection, for in- – How far, if at all, the driver was depress-
stance with the IT systems of the vehicle ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
manufacturer intended for this purpose.
– How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Any collection, processing, and use of per-
This data can help provide a better under-
sonal data above and beyond that needed to
standing of the circumstances in which
provide the services must always be based
crashes and injuries occur.
on a legal permission, contractual arrange-
ment or consent. It is also possible to acti- EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
vate or deactivate the data connection as a a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
whole. That is, with the exception of func- is recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
tions and services required by law such as ing conditions and no personal data, for in-
Assist systems. stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion, are recorded.
Services from other providers However, other parties, such as law enforce-
When using online services from other pro- ment, could combine the EDR data with the
viders, these services are the responsibility type of personally identifying data routinely
of the relevant provider and subject to their acquired during a crash investigation.
data privacy conditions and terms of use. To read data recorded by an EDR, special
The vehicle manufacturer has no influence equipment is required, and access to the ve-
on the content exchanged during this proc- hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
ess. Information on the way in which per- the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
sonal data is collected and used in relation such as law enforcement, that have the spe-
to services from third parties, the scope of cial equipment, can read the information if
such data, and its purpose, can be obtained they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
from the relevant service provider.
12
Information NOTES
Vehicle identification number

General information
Depending on the national-market version,
the vehicle identification number is located
in different positions in the vehicle. This
chapter describes all possible positions for
the series.
The vehicle identification number can be
Engine compartment found on the nameplate, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
Left nameplate
For 3-door models:
The engraved vehicle identification number

can be found in the engine compartment, on
the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Right nameplate The vehicle identification number can be

For 3-door models: found on the nameplate, on the left-hand
For 5-door models:

found on the nameplate, on the right-hand
For 5-door models: found on the nameplate, on the left-hand
13
NOTES Information
Windshield other information about motor vehicle

safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You
can also obtain other information about mo-
tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
The vehicle identification number can also
be found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles
owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti-
fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box
1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,
Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
14
Information NOTES
15
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing Locking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
Buttons on the vehicle key
All vehicle access points are locked.
Buttons for the central locking

system
Overview
1 Unlocking
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
With automatic tailgate operation: open
the tailgate
4 Panic mode
Buttons for the central locking system.
Unlocking the vehicle Locking

Pressing the button locks the vehi-
cle if the front doors are closed.
Depending on the settings, either only the
driver's door or all vehicle access points are
unlocked. Unlocking
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press Pressing the button unlocks the ve-
the button on the vehicle key again to un- hicle.
lock the other vehicle access points.
Press and hold the button on the ve- Panic mode
hicle key after unlocking. You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key
key is pressed. and hold for at least 3 seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
16
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate with

no-touch activation
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without operat- Concept
ing the vehicle key. The tailgate can be opened and closed with
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in no-touch activation using the vehicle key
your pants pocket, is sufficient. you are carrying.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- Performing the foot movement
cle key when it is in close proximity or in
the car's interior. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle
at approx. one arm's length away from
Unlocking the vehicle the rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di-
rection of travel and immediately pull it
back.
On the driver's or front passenger's door

handle, press the button.
Locking the vehicle Tailgate

Without automatic tailgate: Unlocking
On the driver's or front passenger's door

handle, press the button.
– Unlock the vehicle and then press the
button on the outside of the tailgate.
– Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
17
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Depending on the setting, the doors may Displays and control elements
also be unlocked.
With automatic tailgate: Opening In the vicinity of the steering

wheel
– Unlock the vehicle and press the button

on the tailgate. 1 Low beams, fog lights
– Press and hold the button on the 2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-
vehicle key for approx. 1 second. nal
Depending on the setting, the doors may 3 Instrument cluster
also be unlocked. 4 Wiper system
Without automatic tailgate: Closing

Indicator/warning lights
Closing the tailgate manually.
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
With automatic tailgate: Closing a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on.
Driver's door
Press the button on the inside of the tail-

gate.
1 Safety switch
2 Power windows
3 Exterior mirrors
18
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
All around the selector lever Button Function

Press once: opens the previous
display.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Goes to the Options menu.
Voice control
1 Selector lever
2 Controller with buttons
Activating the voice control system
3 Parking brake Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Central Information Display (CID) Wait for the signal.
Say the command.
Concept This icon indicates that the voice con-
The Central Information Display (CID) com- trol system is active.
bines the functions of a multitude of If no other commands are available, operate
switches. These functions can be operated the function via the Central Information
via the Controller. Display (CID).
Buttons on the Controller Terminating the voice control system
Button Function Press the button on the steering
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
Press once: calls up the main
menu.
Press twice: displays all menu
items of the main menu.
Goes to the Communication
menu.
Goes to the Media/Radio menu.
Goes to destination input menu

for navigation.
Goes to navigation map.
19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering Adjusting the head restraint
wheel Height
Manually adjustable seats
– To raise: push the head restraint up.

– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
1 Forward/backward push the head restraint down.
2 Thigh support
3 Height Adjusting the exterior mirrors
4 Backrest tilt
Electrically adjustable seats
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
1 Memory function 3 Folding in and out
2 Lumbar support
3 Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
20
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Adjusting the steering wheel Press the desired button 1 or 2.

The procedure stops when a seat setting
In four directions switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat po-
sition on the driver's side is disabled after a
short while.
Infotainment
Radio
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer- Buttons and functions
red height and angle to suit your seat Depending on the country and equipment
position. version, the radio has the following buttons.
3. Fold the lever back up. Button Function
Press: switches sound output on/
Memory function off.
Concept Turn: adjusts the volume.
The following settings can be stored and, if Change the entertainment
necessary, retrieved using the memory source.
function: Press once: changes the station/
– Seat position. track.
– Exterior mirror position. Press and hold: fast forward/
– Height of the Head-up Display. rewind the track.
Programmable memory buttons.
Storing
1. Switch on the ignition. Changing the waveband/satellite
2. Set the desired position. radio.
3. Press the button. The LED in the Navigation destination input

button lights up.
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 on the Entering a destination via address
seat while the LED is illuminated. The
LED goes out. State/province
1. "Navigation"
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automati- 2. "Enter address"
cally.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
3. "State/Province?" 5. Select the functions for which the mo-

4. Select the country from the list. bile phone is to be used.
6. To perform additional steps on the mo-
Entering the address bile phone, refer to the operating in-
The address can be entered in any order. structions for the mobile phone: for in-
stance search for or connect the
Example: entering the address via the town/ Bluetooth device or a new device.
city
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap-
1. "City/Postal code?" pears on the mobile phone display. Se-
2. Enter the town/city. lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
The list is narrowed down further with 7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
each entry. trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
3. Select the icon.
– Compare the control number dis-
4. Select a town/city from the list. played on the Control Display with
5. If necessary, enter the street. the control number on the display of
6. Select the street as you would the town/ the device. Confirm the control num-
city. ber on the device and on the Control
Display.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
– Enter and confirm the same control
8. Select the icon. number on the device and via the
9. Select a house number or range of house Central Information Display (CID).
numbers from the list. The device is connected and displayed
in the device list.
Starting destination guidance The mobile phone is connected and will ap-
"Start guidance" pear at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered. Using the telephone
Pairing the mobile phone Accepting a call

After the mobile phone is paired once with Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen-
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper- tral Information Display (CID) or the button
ated using the Central Information Display on the steering wheel.
(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo-
ken instructions. Via the Central Information Display (CID)
"Accept"
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings" Via the button on the steering wheel
3. "Mobile devices" Press the button.
4. "Connect new device"
Via the instrument cluster
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis-
played on the Control Display. Use the OK button on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept"
22
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Dialing a number Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

1. "Communication" Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
2. "Dial number" Select CarPlay as the function:
3. Select the numbers individually. "Apple CarPlay"
4. Select the icon. The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
Establish the connection via the additional
telephone:
1. Press the button.

2. "Call via"
Apple CarPlay preparation

Concept
CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information
Display (CID).
Functional requirements
– Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later
with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile contract.
– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-
tion are activated on the iPhone.
– If necessary, the setting for mobile data
must be activated on the iPhone.
– WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the
vehicle.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
23
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
On the road
Driving 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: switching off

Starting and stopping the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on/off
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
– On: press the Start/Stop
button. 3. Set the parking brake.
Most of the indicator/
Auto Start/Stop function
warning lights light up for
a varied length of time. Steptronic transmission: switches the en-
gine off automatically while stationary to
– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.
save fuel. The engine starts automatically
All indicator lights go out. when the brake pedal is released.
– Radio-ready state: when the ignition is Manual transmission: switches the engine
switched off, press the ON/OFF button off automatically while stationary to save
on the radio or when the engine is run- fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de-
ning, press the Start/Stop button. pressed, the engine starts automatically.
Some electrical consumers remain ready
for operation. Parking brake
Start/stop engine Set the electrical parking brake

Pull the switch when the vehicle is
Steptronic transmission: starting stationary.
1. Depress the brake pedal. The LED and indicator light light up.
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
Releasing
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: press the switch
while the brake pedal is pressed.
Manual transmission: starting
Steptronic transmission: press the switch
1. Depress the brake pedal.
while the brake is pressed or selector lever
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to position P is set.
neutral. The LED and indicator light go out.
3. Press the Start/Stop button. The parking brake is released.
Steptronic transmission: switching off
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply
the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
24
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Manual transmission Steptronic transmission, Sport and

manual mode
Shifting
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right in order to
prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or
4th gear.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary.
To overcome the resistance push the gear-
shift lever dynamically to the left and en- Sport program:
gage reverse gear with a forward shifting Press the selector lever to the left from se-
movement. lector lever position D.
Steptronic transmission Manual mode:
– To shift down: press the selector lever
Selector lever positions forward.
Parking position P. – To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards.
R is reverse.
Neutral N.
Gear position D.
Turn signal, high beams, headlight
flasher, roadside parking lights
Engage selector lever position P or R only
when the vehicle is stationary.
Turn signal
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a gear position or reverse, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you
are ready to start.
Selector lever lock

A lock prevents an inadvertent change from
selector lever position P to another selector
lever position and, depending on the trans-
mission version, inadvertent switching to
selector lever position P or R. – On: press the lever past the resistance
To release the lock: with the brake pedal de- point.
pressed, press the button on the front or – Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist-
side of the selector lever. ance point.
– Off: press the lever past the resistance
point in the opposite direction.
– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap
the lever up or down.
25
– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re- Lights and lighting
sistance point and hold it there for as
long as you want the turn signal to flash. Light functions
High beams, headlight flasher Icon Function

Front fog lights.
Automatic headlight control.

Cornering light.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
– High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams light up when the low Low beams.
beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2. Instrument lighting.
Canada: roadside parking light

Wiper system
Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– On: with the radio-ready state switched
off, press the lever either up or down
past the resistance point for approx.
2 seconds.
– Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-
ance point in the opposite direction. Press the lever up until the desired position
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers: posi-
tion 0.
26
– Rain sensor: position 1. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

– Normal wiper speed: position 2. sensor
– Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Switching off and brief wipe
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield

Press the lever down.
– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
Rain sensor
Activating/deactivating Pull the lever.
Canada: wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief
wipe
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
standard position.
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

ance point.
27
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap sensor
once beyond the resistance point.
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

– To switch off fast wipe: press down
twice.
– To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
Rain sensor
Pull the lever.
Activating/deactivating
Climate control
Air conditioner
Button Function
Temperature.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Air conditioning.
Air recirculation mode.
28
Button Function Button Function

Controls the air flow, Windshield defroster.
manual.
Rear window defroster.
Controls the air distribution

manually. Refueling stop
Refueling
Windshield defroster.
Fuel cap
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the
rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap
Automatic climate control opens.
Button Function
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Maximum cooling. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
AUTO program. tached to the fuel filler flap.
Automatic air recirculation Gasoline

control AUC/recirculated- For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
air mode. should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur
Controls the air flow, content.
manual. Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without
metallic additives.
Information on the recommended fuel grade
can be found in the Owner's Manual.
Air distribution, manual.
Defrosts and defogs the

windows.
29
Wheels and tires Adding engine oil

Tire inflation pressure specifications General information
Switch off the ignition and safely park the
vehicle before engine oil is added.
Adding engine oil
The tire inflation pressure values can be

found on the sign on the door pillar.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Only add engine oil when the message is
Regularly check the tire inflation pressure
displayed in the instrument cluster.
and correct it as needed:
– At least twice a month. Observe the quantity to be added in the
– Before embarking on an extended trip. message.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
After correcting the tire inflation Observe recommended engine oil types.
pressure
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Providing assistance
Electronic oil measurement Hazard warning flashers
Requirements
A current measured value is available after
approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a
shorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-
ciently long trip is displayed.
Displaying the engine oil level

1. "My MINI" The button is located above the Control Dis-
play.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
30
Breakdown assistance
MINI Roadside Assistance
This service can be reached around the
clock in many countries.
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-
tance is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
31
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
This chapter describes all standard, country- When using these functions and systems,
specific and optional features offered with the applicable laws and regulations must be
the series. It also describes features and observed.
functions that are not necessarily available
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 81 Lights off

2 Exterior mirror operation 95 Daytime running lights 154
3 Buttons of the central locking sys- Parking lights 152
tem 68
4 Lights
Low beams 152
Front fog lights 155
Light switch 152
32
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Automatic headlight con- Canada: roadside parking

trol 153 light 153
Cornering light 154
Trip computer 142
High-beam Assistant 154
Instrument lighting 156
7 Instrument cluster 129
8 Steering column stalk, right
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Wipers 112
Camera-based cruise control
Wiper on Canadian mod-
on/off 187
els 116
Cruise control on/off 194 Rain sensor 113
Rain sensor on Canadian mod-
els 117
Speed Limiter 178
Cleaning windows 114
Pausing, continuing cruise

control Rear window wiper in Cana-
dian models 114
Cruise control: increase speed
Rear window wiper 114
Cruise control: reduce speed

Clean the rear window 114
Camera-based cruise control:

reduce distance 9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Camera-based cruise control: Voice control 44
increase distance
Telephone
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 112
Confirm the selection 141
High beams, head-

light flasher 112 Move selection up 141
High-beam Assistant 154

Move selection down 141
33
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Increase volume 11 Heated steering wheel 97

12 Adjusting the steering wheel 97
Reduce volume 13 Unlocking the hood 277
14 Depending on the equipment: using tail-
gate 72
10 Horn, entire surface
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 292 6 PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 197
Rearview camera 200
Intelligent Safety 169
Parking assistant 203
Auto Start/Stop func-
2 Control Display 36 tion 107
3 Radio/Multimedia
Start/stop the engine and
4 Glove compartment 229 switch the ignition on/
5 Climate control 208 off 104
34
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 8 Controller with buttons 39

182 9 Parking brake 110
MINI Driving Modes
switch 184
7 Steptronic transmission selector

lever 121
Manual transmission gearshift
lever 120
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Call, SOS 293 4 Ambient light 156
2 Indicator light, front-seat pas- 5 Panoramic glass sunroof 83

senger airbag 161
3 Reading lights 156 6 Interior lights 156
35
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options Input and display
This chapter describes all standard, country- Main menu
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and General information
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- The main menu is divided into two areas.
tions or country versions. This also applies The left area contains menu items that can
to safety-related functions and systems. be used to call up all functions from the on-
When using these functions and systems, board monitor. The menu items in the right
the applicable laws and regulations must be area show dynamic contents that enable
quick access to certain functions.
observed.
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller.
Safety information Media/Radio

All functions for the entertainment system,
for instance radio stations or pairing with
external devices.
Warning
Operating the integrated information sys- Communication
tems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- Telephone and message function, e-mail and
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is calendar and also pairing and managing mo-
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or bile devices, for instance smartphones.
devices when the traffic situation allows.
As warranted, stop and use the systems Navigation
and devices while the vehicle is stationary. Access to the navigation system, destina-
tion input and traffic bulletins. Configurable
map views and other functions, such as
Points of Interest.
36
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
My MINI – Destination search: place names can be

Information on the vehicle status and avail- entered in all languages that are availa-
able settings for vehicle and on-board moni- ble on the Control Display.
tor. Access to the Integrated Owner's
Manual. Activating/deactivating the
functions
MINI Connected Several menu items are preceded by a
Access to apps and vehicle functions. Addi- checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether
tional apps and vehicle functions can be the function is activated or deactivated. Se-
purchased from the MINI Connected Store. lecting the menu item activates or deacti-
vates the function.
Messages Function is activated.
Access to all incoming messages in the ve- Function is deactivated.
hicle, for instance Check Control messages.
Status information
Letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be- General information
tween entering upper and lower case let- The status field can be found in the upper
ters, numbers and characters: area of the Control Display. Status informa-
Icon Function tion is displayed in the form of symbols.
Change between capital and Radio

lower-case letters.
Insert blank space. Icon Meaning
Use voice control. HD Radio station is being re-
ceived.
Confirm entry.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Without navigation system
Telephone
Select the icon.
Icon Meaning
Entry comparison
Incoming or outgoing call.
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter Missed call.
entered and letters may be added automati-
cally. Signal strength of cellular network.
Entries are continuously compared with Symbol flashes: network search.
data stored in the vehicle. Cellular network is not available.
– Only those letters are offered during en- Roaming is active.
try for which data is available.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
37
Icon Meaning Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus which
Reminder.
support the split screen function.
Sending not possible.
1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
Entertainment
2. Press the Controller.
Icon Meaning 3. Select the desired setting.
Bluetooth audio. Specifying the number of displays
USB audio interface. It is possible to specify the number of dis-
Mobile phone audio interface. plays.
Apple CarPlay. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the

split screen is selected.
Other symbols 2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
Icon Meaning 4. Select the desired setting.
Check Control message. 5. Tilt the Controller to the left.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Control elements
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle po- Overview
sition.
Checking the current vehicle posi-
tion.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on
the right side of the split screen, for in-
stance information from the trip computer. 1 Control Display with touchscreen
In the divided screen view, the so-called 2 Controller with buttons
split screen, this information remains visi-
ble even when switching to another menu.
Control Display
Switching the split screen on/off
General information
1. Press the button. To clean the Control Display, follow the care
2. "Split screen" instructions, refer to page 303.
38
In the case of very high temperatures on Controller

the Control Display, for instance due to in-
tense solar radiation, the brightness may be General information
reduced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, for in- The buttons can be used to open the menus
stance through shade or air conditioning, directly. The Controller can be used to se-
the normal functions are restored. lect menu items and enter the settings.
Safety information Operation

– Turn to switch between menu items, for
example.
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Con-
trol Display can shift and damage the Con-
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage.
Do not place objects in the area in front of
the Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically

The Control Display is switched on automat- – Press to select a menu item, for example.
ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as
soon as the Control Display is needed for
operation.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if
no operation is performed on the vehicle for
several minutes.
Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off – With navigation system: tilt in four di-
manually. rections to switch between displays, for
example.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the
Controller to switch it back on again.
39
– Without navigation system: tilt in two Operating via the Controller

directions to switch between displays,
for example.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
The main menu is displayed.
Press once: calls up the main All Central Information Display (CID) func-
menu. tions can be called up via the main menu.
Press twice: displays all menu
items of the main menu. Adjusting the main menu
With navigation system: opens
the Communication menu. 1. Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu are
With navigation system: opens displayed.
the Media/Radio menu.
2. Select a menu item.
Without navigation system: open
3. To move the menu item to the desired
the Audio menu.
position, tilt the Controller to the right
Without navigation system: or left.
opens the Telephone menu.
With navigation system: opens Selecting menu items
destination input menu for navi- Highlighted menu items can be selected.
gation.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired
With navigation system: opens menu item is highlighted.
navigation map. 2. Press the Controller.
Press once: opens the previous
display. Adjusting menu contents
Press and hold: open the menus The display of menus "Media/Radio",
used last. "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can
be adjusted, for instance to remove the en-
Goes to the Options menu.
tries of functions that are not used from the
menu.
40
Via the Central Information Display (CID): The "Options" menu is displayed.
1. Select the menu. The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
2. "Personalize menu"
– "Split screen": screen settings.
3. Select desired menu contents to be dis-
– "Media/Radio": control options for the
played.
selected main menu.
Dynamic contents – "Save station": if applicable, further con-
trol options for the selected menu.
You can display dynamic contents within
the menu items. The contents of the menu Entering letters and numbers
items update automatically, e.g., the active
destination guidance in the navigation.
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or
1. "My MINI" numbers.
2. "Contents of main menu" 2. : confirm entry.
Changing between displays Deleting

After a menu item is selected, for instance
"System settings", a new display appears. Icon Function
– Tilt the Controller to the left. Press the Controller: delete
The current display closes and the previ- letters or number.
ous display is shown. or Hold the Controller down: de-
lete all letters or numbers.
– Press the button.
The previous display re-opens. Using alphabetical lists
– Tilt the Controller to the right. For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
The new display opens. tries, the letters for which there is an entry
An arrow indicates that additional displays are displayed at the left edge.
can be opened.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
Opening recently used menus
All letters for which there are entries
The recently used menus can be displayed. are displayed on the left edge.
Press and hold this button. 2. Select the first letter of the desired en-
The recently used menus are dis- try.
played. The first entry of the selected letter is
displayed.
Going to the Options menu
Press the button.
41
Operation via touchscreen Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display
General information opens.
The Control Display is equipped with a An arrow indicates that additional displays
touchscreen. can be opened.
Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not – Swipe to the left.
use any objects. – Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the icon. Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Tap the icon on the touchscreen.
A keyboard is displayed on the Control
Display.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting
The main menu is displayed. Icon Function
All Central Information Display (CID) func- Tapping the icon: deletes the letter
tions can be called up via the main menu. or number.
Adjusting the main menu Tapping and holding the icon all
letters: deletes all letters or num-
1. Tap on the icon. bers.
2. Drag the menu item to the desired posi-
tion on the right or left. Operating navigation map
Selecting menu items The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
Tap the desired menu item.
Function Operation
Dynamic contents Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the
You can display dynamic contents within map. fingers.
the menu items. The contents of the menu
items update automatically, e.g., the active
destination guidance in the navigation.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Contents of main menu"
42
Programmable memory but-

tons
General information
The Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be stored on the programmable
memory buttons and called up directly, for
instance radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Storing a function
1. Select the function via the Central Infor-
mation Display (CID).
2. Press and hold the desired but-

ton, until a signal sounds.
Executing a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for instance that the number is
dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed
in the upper area of the Control Display.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously
for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
43
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options activation system. To set the language,
refer to page 48.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Always say commands in the language
specific and optional features offered with of the voice activation system.
the series. It also describes features and
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Using the voice activation sys-
tions or country versions. This also applies tem
the applicable laws and regulations must be Activating the voice control system
observed.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Concept Wait for the signal.
Say the command.
Most functions displayed on the Control This icon indicates that the voice con-
Display can be operated by voice commands trol system is active.
via the voice activation system. The system No other commands may be available. In
supports you with announcements during this case, operate the function via the Cen-
input. tral Information Display (CID).
Terminating the voice control

General information system
– Functions that can only be used when
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
the vehicle is stationary can only be op-
erated via the voice activation system to
a limited extent.
– The system uses a special microphone Possible commands
on the driver's side.
– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver- General information
bal instructions to use with the voice ac- Most menu items on the Control Display can
tivation system. be spoken as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be
spoken.
You can also select list entries such as
phone list entries via voice activation. Read
– A language must be set via the Control
Display that is supported by the voice
44
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
these list entries out loud exactly as they Settings

are shown in the respective list.
Displaying possible commands Setting the voice control

The following is displayed in the top area of You can set the system to use standard dia-
the Control Display: log or a short version.
– Some possible commands for the current The short version of the voice control plays
menu. back short messages in abbreviated form.
– Some possible commands from other Via the Central Information Display (CID):
menus. 1. "My MINI"
– Status of the voice recognition. 2. "System settings"
– Encrypted connection is not availa- 3. "Language"
ble.
4. "Speech mode:"
Help on the voice activation system 5. Select the desired setting.
– ›General information on voice control‹:
have information on the operating prin- Activating voice recognition via
ciple of the voice activation system read the server
out loud. The voice recognition feature via the server
– ›Help‹: have help for the current menu provides a dictation function and a natural
read out loud. method of destination input while improv-
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use
the functions, data is transmitted to a serv-
Example: going to the sound ice provider via an encrypted connection
and stored locally there.
settings
The commands of the menu items are spo- 1. "My MINI"
ken just as they are selected via the Con- 2. "System settings"
troller.
3. "Language"
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-
4. "Server speech recognition"
put, if needed.
2. Press the button on the steering Adjusting the volume

wheel. Turn the volume button during the spoken
3. ›Media and radio‹ instructions until the desired volume is set.
4. ›Tone‹ – The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is
changed.
– The volume is stored for the profile cur-
rently used.
45
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Information on Emergency If it was not possible to activate voice com-

mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices
Requests appears on the Control Display.
Do not use the voice activation system to

initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful Voice assistants from third-
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es- party providers
tablishment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to Concept
page 293, close to the interior mirror. Some third-party providers provide digital
voice assistants. Supported voice assistants
can be used in the vehicle.
System limits
General information
– Certain noises can be detected and may Some of the functions are limited in the ve-
lead to problems. Keep the doors, win- hicle to prevent any impairment of safety
dows, and glass sunroof closed. while driving.
– Noises from the front passenger or the
rear seat bench can impair the system. Functional requirements
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle – If applicable, corresponding Connected
while speaking. Service subsequently purchased via
– Major language dialects can cause prob- MINI Connected Store.
lems with the voice recognition feature. – Vehicle added in the MINI app.
Speak loud and clear.
– Third-party provider account and MINI
account connected in the MINI app.
Using the voice activation sys- – Smartphone connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth audio.
tem of the smartphone
Activation in the MINI app
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can Third-party assistants are set up in the
be used via voice control. MINI app.
Activate voice command response on the Follow the instructions in the app.
smartphone for this purpose.
Activation in the vehicle
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. 1. Press the button on the steering
Voice command response is activated on wheel.
the smartphone. 2. Wait for the signal.
2. Release the button. 3. Say the specific activation word of the
third-party provider and the desired
If activation is successful, a confirma- command.
tion appears on the Control Display.
46
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Information about the active function is

displayed on the Control Display.
Malfunction
In case of a malfunction, switch off the en-
gine and start the engine again.
47
AT A GLANCE General settings
General settings
Vehicle features and options The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Setting the time
the series. It also describes features and Via the Central Information Display (CID):
functions that are not necessarily available 1. "My MINI"
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies 2. "System settings"
to safety-related functions and systems. 3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
observed. 5. Turn the Controller until the desired
hours are displayed.
Language 7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
nutes are displayed.
Setting the language 8. Press the Controller.
1. "My MINI"
Setting the time format
3. If necessary, "Language" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Language:" 2. "System settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Date and time"
The setting is stored for the driver profile 4. "Time format:"
currently used. 5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Time
Setting the time zone Date
1. "My MINI"
Setting the date
3. "Date and time" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Time zone:" 2. "System settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Date and time"
48
General settings AT A GLANCE
4. "Date:" Activating/deactivating the

5. Turn the Controller until the desired day display of the current vehicle
is displayed.
position
7. Make the settings for the month and Concept
year.
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the
Setting the date format current vehicle position can be displayed in
the MINI Connected app.
1. "My MINI" Activating/deactivating
2. "System settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
3. "Date and time" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Date format:" 2. "Vehicle settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Data privacy"
The setting is stored for the driver profile 4. "Vehicle tracking"
currently used. 5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the units of measure- Activating/deactivating pop-

ment ups
You can set the units of measurement for For some functions, pop-ups are displayed
some values, for example, consumption, dis- automatically on the Control Display. Some
tances and temperature. of these pop-ups can be activated or deacti-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): vated.
1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
2. "System settings" 1. "My MINI"
3. "Units" 2. "System settings"
4. Select the desired menu item. 3. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting. 4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used. currently used.
Control Display
Brightness
49
1. "My MINI" General information

2. "System settings" The setting of the color world effects the
following display content:
3. "Displays"
– On-board monitor.
4. "Control display"
– Instrument cluster.
5. "Brightness at night"
– Head-up Display.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired Depending on the equipment, the color
brightness is set. world can be applied as basic display for the
7. Press the Controller. LED ring on the central instrument.
The setting is stored for the driver profile LED ring on the central instrument cluster,
currently used. refer to page 146.
Depending on the light conditions, the
brightness settings may not be clearly visi- Setting the color world
ble. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Screensaver 1. "My MINI"

If no entries are made via the Central Infor- 2. "System settings"
mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be 3. "Displays"
displayed after an adjustable time. 4. "Color scheme"
5. Select the desired setting.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
Messages
4. "Control display"
Concept
5. "Screensaver"
The menu centrally displays all messages ar-
6. Select the desired setting. riving in the vehicle in list form.
currently used. General information
The following messages can be displayed:
– Traffic messages.
Instrument cluster with en-
– Communication messages, for example
hanced features: color world e-mails, SMS text messages or remind-
ers.
Concept – Check Control messages.
The display of the display content can be – Messages on service notifications.
configured individually, for instance in a – Messages from the vehicle manufac-
harmonic color style. turer.
Messages are additionally displayed in the
status field.
50
Retrieving messages Data protection

1. "Notifications" Data transfer
2. Select the desired notification.
Concept
The menu in which the notification is dis- The vehicle offers various functions which
played will open. require data to be transferred to MINI or a
service provider. The data transfer can be
Deleting messages deactivated for some functions.
All messages, except Check Control mes-
sages or messages from the vehicle manu- General information
facturer, can be deleted from the list. With data transfer deactivated, the respec-
Check Control messages or messages from tive function cannot be used.
the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as Only make these settings while stationary.
long as they are relevant.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Activating/deactivating
1. "Notifications" Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
2. Select the desired message.
3. Press the button. 1. "My MINI"
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all 2. "System settings"
notifications"
3. "Data privacy"
Settings 4. Select the desired setting.
The following settings can be adjusted:
– Select the applications, from which mes- Deleting personal data in the
sages will be permitted. vehicle
– Sort the messages according to date or
priority. Concept
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
1. "My MINI" This personal data can be permanently de-
2. "System settings" leted via the Central Information Display
(CID).
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting. General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
following data is deleted:
– Driver profile settings.
– Stored radio stations.
– Stored programmable memory buttons.
51
– Travel and trip computer information. connection type to select depends on the
– Music collection. mobile device and the desired function.
– Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions. General information
– Phone book. The following overview shows possible
functions and the suitable connection types
– Office data, for instance voice memos. for them. The scope of functions depends on
– Login accounts. the mobile device.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take Function Connec-
up to 15 minutes. tion type
Functional requirement Making calls via the hands- Bluetooth.

free system.
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Using phone functions via
Deleting data the Central Information Dis-
play (CID).
Note and follow the instructions on the Con-
trol Display. Using the smartphone Of-
fice functions.
Playing music from the Bluetooth
1. "My MINI" smartphone or the audio or USB.
2. "System settings" player.
3. "Data privacy" Using compatible apps via Bluetooth
4. "Delete personal data" the Central Information Dis- or USB.
play (CID).
5. "Delete personal data"
USB storage device: USB.
6. "OK"
Exporting and importing
7. Exit and lock the vehicle. driver profiles.
The deletion process takes 15 minutes to Update the software.
complete.
Playing music.
If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele-
tion. Playing videos from the USB.
smartphone or the USB de-
Canceling deletion vice.
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the Using Apple CarPlay apps Bluetooth
data. via the Central Information and
Display (CID) and voice op- WLAN.
eration.
Connections
The following connection types require one-
Concept time pairing with the vehicle:
Various connection types are available for – Bluetooth.
using mobile devices in the vehicle. The – Apple CarPlay.
52
Paired devices are automatically recognized Bluetooth connection

later on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information – Compatible device, refer to page 53,
with Bluetooth interface.
Warning – The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
Operating the integrated information sys- – The device is ready for operation.
tems and communication devices while – Bluetooth is activated on the device and
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- in the vehicle, refer to page 53.
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or – Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,
devices when the traffic situation allows. may be required on the device; refer to
As warranted, stop and use the systems the owner's manual of the device.
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Switching on Bluetooth
Compatible devices
1. "My MINI"
General information 2. "System settings"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not 3. "Mobile devices"
listed or deviating software versions. 4. "Settings"
Displaying the vehicle identification 5. "Bluetooth®"
number and software part number
Activating/deactivating telephone
When looking for compatible devices, you
functions
may have to state the vehicle identification
number and the software part number. To use all supported functions of a mobile
These numbers can be displayed in the ve- phone, the following functions must be acti-
hicle. vated prior to pairing.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings" 2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings" 4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info" 5. Select the desired setting:
6. "System information" – "Office"
A software update, refer to page 58, can Activate function to transmit short
be performed. messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
memos, and reminders to the vehi-
cle. Costs can be incurred by trans-
mitting all data to the vehicle.
– "Contact images"
53
Activate function to show the con- Frequently Asked Questions

tact pictures. All requirements are met and all required
steps were completed in the specified order.
Pairing the mobile device with the Despite that, the mobile device does not
vehicle function as expected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): In this case, the following explanations can
1. "My MINI" help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired
or connected?
3. "Mobile devices" – There are too many Bluetooth devices
4. "Connect new device" connected to the mobile phone or vehi-
5. Select the functions for which the de- cle.
vice will be used: Delete Bluetooth connections with other
– "Telephone" devices.
– "Bluetooth® audio" Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
– "Apps" and start a new device search.
– "Apple CarPlay" – The mobile phone is in power-save mode
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- or has only a limited remaining battery
played on the Control Display. life.
6. On the mobile device, search for Blue- Charge the mobile phone.
tooth devices in the vicinity. Why does the mobile phone no longer re-
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- act?
pears on the mobile device display. – The applications on the mobile phone do
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi- not function anymore.
cle. Switch the mobile phone off and on
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- again.
trol number is displayed or the control – Possibly too high or too low ambient
number must be entered. temperatures for mobile phone opera-
– Compare the control number dis- tion.
played on the Control Display with Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
the control number on the display of treme ambient temperatures.
the device.
Why can phone functions not be used via
Confirm the control number on the the Central Information Display (CID)?
device and on the Control Display.
– The mobile phone may not be properly
– Enter and confirm the same control configured, for instance as Bluetooth au-
number on the device and via the dio device.
Central Information Display (CID).
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-
The device is connected and displayed phone or additional phone function.
in the device list.
Why are no or not all telephone book en-
If connection was not successful: Fre- tries displayed or why are they incomplete?
quently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.
54
– Transmission of the telephone book en- – Audio devices with USB port, for in-
tries is not yet complete. stance MP3 players.
– It is possible that only the telephone – USB storage devices.
book entries of the mobile phone or the Common file systems are supported.
SIM card are transmitted. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
– It may not be possible to display tele- formats.
phone book entries with special charac- A connected USB device will be supplied
ters. with charge current via the USB port if the
– It may not be possible to transmit con- device supports this. Follow the maximum
tacts from social networks. charge current of the USB port.
– The number of phone book entries to be The following uses are possible on USB
stored is too high. ports with data transfer:
– Data volume of the contact too large, for – Exporting and importing driver profiles,
instance due to stored information such refer to page 75.
as memos. – Playing music files via USB audio.
Reduce the data volume of the contact. – Playing videos via USB video.
– A mobile phone is only connected as an – Loading of software updates, refer to
audio source. page 58.
Reconfigure the mobile phone and con- Follow the following when connecting:
nect it with the telephone or additional
– Do not use force when plugging the con-
phone function.
nector into the USB port.
How can the telephone connection quality
– Use a flexible adapter cable.
be improved?
– Protect the USB device against mechani-
– The strength of the Bluetooth signal on
cal damage.
the mobile phone can be adjusted, de-
pending on the mobile phone. – Due to the large number of USB devices
available on the market, it cannot be
– Insert the mobile phone into the wire-
guaranteed that every device is operable
less charging tray.
on the vehicle.
– Adjust the volume of the microphone
– Do not expose USB devices to extreme
and loudspeakers separately.
environmental conditions, such as very
If all points in this list have been checked high temperatures; refer to the owner's
and the required function is still not availa- manual of the device.
ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service
– Due to the many different compression
center or another qualified service center or
techniques, proper playback of the me-
repair shop.
dia stored on the USB device cannot be
guaranteed in all cases.
USB connection
– To ensure proper transmission of the
General information stored data, do not charge a USB device
via the onboard socket, when it is con-
The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port.
nected to the USB port:
– Depending on how the USB device is be-
– Mobile phones. ing used, settings may be required on
55
the USB storage device, refer to the Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
owner's manual of the device. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Not compatible USB devices:
1. "My MINI"
– USB hard drives.
– USB hubs.
– USB memory card readers with multiple 3. "Mobile devices"
slots. 4. "Settings"
– HFS-formatted USB devices. 5. Select the following settings:
– Devices such as fans or lamps. – "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 53, with Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
USB port. Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to
page 54, via Bluetooth
Connecting the device
Select CarPlay as the function:
Connect the USB device using a suitable
"Apple CarPlay"
adapter cable to a USB port, refer to
page 224. The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list, refer to
The USB device is connected to the vehicle
page 57.
and displayed in the device list.
Operation
Apple CarPlay preparation
For more information, refer to the
Concept Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
CarPlay allows certain functions of a communication.
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information Frequently Asked Questions
Display (CID).
All requirements are met and all required
Functional requirements steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53. function as expected.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. In this case, the following explanations can
– Corresponding mobile contract. help:
– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera- The iPhone has already been paired with
tion are activated on the iPhone. Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is
– Booking the MINI Connected service: established, CarPlay can no longer be se-
Apple CarPlay preparation. lected.
– If necessary, the setting for mobile data – Delete the iPhone concerned from the
must be activated on the iPhone. device list.
56
– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con- Configuring the device

cerned from the list of stored vehicles Functions can be activated or deactivated
under Bluetooth and under WLAN. for paired and connected devices.
– Pair the iPhone as a new device. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available: 1. "My MINI"
contact the hotline, a dealer's service center 2. "System settings"
or another qualified service center or repair 3. "Mobile devices"
shop.
4. Select the desired device.
Managing mobile devices 5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the
General information function will be deactivated where appro-
– After one-time pairing, the devices are priate for a device that is already connected
automatically recognized and recon- and the device will be disconnected.
nected when the ignition is switched on.
– The data stored on the SIM card or in Disconnecting the device
the mobile phone is transferred to the The device's connection to the vehicle is
vehicle after recognition. disconnected.
– For some devices, certain settings may The device remains paired and can be con-
be necessary, for instance authorization, nected again, refer to page 57.
see owner's manual of the device. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Displaying the device list 1. "My MINI"
All devices paired and/or connected with 2. "System settings"
the vehicle are displayed in the device list. 3. "Mobile devices"
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. Select device.
1. "My MINI" 5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
3. "Mobile devices"
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
A icon indicates, for which function a de-
vice is used. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Icon Function 1. "My MINI"
"Telephone" 2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
"Additional telephone"
4. Select device.
"Bluetooth® audio"
5. "Connect device"
"Apps"
The functions that were assigned to the de-
"Apple CarPlay" vice before disconnecting are assigned to
the device when it is reconnected. The func-
57
tions may be deactivated on a device al- Displaying the version of the installed
ready connected. software
The software version installed in the vehicle
Deleting the device is displayed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings" 2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Software update"
4. Select device. 4. "Show current version"
5. "Delete device" If an update has been carried out before, se-
The device is disconnected and removed lect the desired version to display additional
from the device list. information.
Swapping the telephone and additional Updating software via USB

telephone The software may only be updated when the
If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle, the functions of the telephone and Via the Central Information Display (CID):
additional telephone can be switched.
1. Store the file for the software update in
the main folder of a USB device.
1. "My MINI" 2. Connecting USB device to the USB port.
2. "System settings" 3. "My MINI"
3. "Mobile devices" 4. "System settings"
4. "Settings" 5. "Software update"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
Software update
8. "Install software"
General information 9. "OK"
The vehicle supports a large number of mo- 10. Wait for the update to complete.
bile devices, for example mobile phones and 11. Confirm system restart.
MP3 players. Software updates are available
for many of the supported devices. The ve-
hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle Restoring the software version
software updates. You can restore the software to the version
Contact a dealer's service center or another prior to the last update or to its factory set-
qualified service center or repair shop for tings.
information on available software updates. The software may only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
58
1. "My MINI"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5. – "Previous version"
The previous software version is re-
stored.
– "Default software settings"
The first software version is re-
stored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
59
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's
This chapter describes all standard, country- Manuals, which are included in addition to
specific and optional features offered with the onboard literature.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Integrated Owner's Manual in
tions or country versions. This also applies the vehicle
the applicable laws and regulations must be Concept
observed. The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
General information can be displayed on the Control Display.
You can use the following media formats to Selecting the Owner's Manual
call up the content in the Owner's Manual:
– Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
page 60. 2. "My MINI"
– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- 3. "Owner's Manual"
cle, refer to page 60. 4. Select the desired method of accessing
the contents.
Printed Owner's Manual Scrolling through the Owner's

Manual
Concept Turn the Controller, until the next or previ-
The printed Owner's Manual describes all ous contents are displayed.
standard, country-specific, and optional fea-
tures offered with the series. Context help
General information General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- The section of the Owner's Manual relating
tainment, and Communication can be ob- to the function that is currently selected
tained as a printed book from the service can be displayed directly.
center.
60
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Opening via Central Information

Display (CID)
Change directly to the Options menu from
the function on the Control Display:

2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance
radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control
Display and to alternate between the two
displays:

2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to

the last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the

page of the Owner's Manual displayed
last.
To alternate continuously between the last
displayed function and the last displayed
page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4
& 5. Opens a new display every time.
61
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Safety Instructions
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

specific and optional features offered with The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
the series. It also describes features and Batteries or button cells can be swallowed
functions that are not necessarily available and lead to serious or fatal injuries within
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- two hours, for example, due to internal
tions or country versions. This also applies burns or chemical burns. There is an in-
to safety-related functions and systems. jury hazard or danger to life. Keep the ve-
When using these functions and systems, hicle key and batteries out of reach for
the applicable laws and regulations must be children. Immediately seek medical help if
observed. there is any suspicion that a battery or
button cell has been swallowed or is lo-
cated in any part of the body.
Vehicle key
General information Warning
The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle People or animals in the vehicle can lock
keys with integrated key. the doors from the inside and lock them-
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
tery, refer to page 65. be opened from the outside. There is a risk
of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so
Depending on the equipment and country that the vehicle can be opened from the
version, various settings, refer to page 78, outside.
can be configured for the button functions.
A personal driver profile, refer to page 75,
for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.
Warning
To provide information on maintenance rec-
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
ommendations, the service data is stored in
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
the vehicle key, refer to page 285.
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle stance due to the following actions:
key, take the vehicle key with you when ex-
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
iting the vehicle.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
62
Opening and closing CONTROLS
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do – The settings stored in the driver profile,
not leave children or animals unattended refer to page 75, are applied.
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with – The driver's seat is set to the last posi-
you when exiting and lock the vehicle. tion saved in the driver's profile. This
function must be activated in the set-
tings, refer to page 78.
Overview
– The interior lights, refer to page 156,
and the MINI logo projection are
switched on, provided that the interior
lights were not switched off manually.
– Depending on the settings, the welcome
light and pathway lighting, refer to
page 153, are switched on.
– The alarm system, refer to page 79, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the am-
1 Unlocking bient brightness.
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate Convenient opening
With automatic tailgate operation: open Press and hold the button on the ve-
the tailgate hicle key after unlocking.
4 Panic mode
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle
Unlocking key is pressed.
Locking
Depending on the settings, refer to 1. Close the driver's door.
page 78, the following access points are
unlocked. 2. Press the button on the vehicle
key.
– Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
The following functions are executed:
Press the button on the vehicle key
again to unlock the other vehicle access – All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler
points. flap are locked.
– All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. – Locking is confirmed by the turn signals
and the horn. This function must be ac-
In addition, the following functions are exe- tivated in the settings, refer to
cuted: page 78.
– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig- – The alarm system, refer to page 79, is
nals and the horn. This function must be switched on.
activated in the settings, refer to
page 78. If the engine or ignition is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
honks twice. In this case, the engine or ig-
63
nition must be switched off by means of the Tailgate

Start/Stop button.
General information
With Comfort Access: convenient To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
closing cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
area.
Safety information Depending on the equipment and country
version, it is possible to specify whether the
Warning tailgate can be activated with the vehicle
With convenient closing, body parts can key and how the vehicle doors will respond
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make to this. To perform settings, refer to
sure that the area of movement of the page 78.
doors is clear during convenient closing.
Safety information
Closing Warning
Press and hold the button on the ve- Body parts can be jammed when operating
hicle key in the area close to the ve- the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
hicle. sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
closed, as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
NOTICE
Switch on interior lights and The tailgate swings back and up when it
courtesy light opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty, among other potential damage. Make
Press the button on the vehicle key sure that the area of movement of the tail-
with the vehicle locked. gate is clear during opening and closing.
The MINI logo projection is also switched
on.
NOTICE
These functions are not available if the inte-
rior lights were switched off manually. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv-
The light functions may depend on the am-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property,
bient brightness.
among other potential damage. Cover the
After locking, wait 10 seconds before press- edges and ensure that pointed objects do
ing the button again. not hit the windows.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the ve-
hicle key for approx. 1 second.
64
Without automatic tailgate operation: 3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung the battery compartment and raise the
upward. cover.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
– Press the button on the vehicle
key and hold for at least 3 sec-
onds. 4. Push battery in arrow direction using a
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle pointed object and lift it out.
key three times in succession.
Replacing the battery
NOTE
Improper batteries in the vehicle key can
damage the vehicle key. There is a danger
of damage to property. Always replace the 5. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with
discharged battery with a battery with the the positive side facing up.
same voltage, the same size and the same
specification. 6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle
1. Remove the integrated key from the ve- key until it engages.
hicle key, refer to page 67. Have old batteries disposed of by a
2. Slide the integrated key into the open- dealer’s service center or another
ing and raise the cover. qualified service center or specialist
The battery compartment is accessible. workshop or take them to a collection point.
Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from a
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-
placed by a dealer’s service center or an-
65
other qualified service center or repair Starting the engine via emergency
shop. detection of the Vehicle key
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circum-
stances:
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer It is not possible to start the engine if the
to page 65. vehicle key has not been detected.
– Interference of the radio connection Proceed as follows in this case:
from transmission towers or other
equipment with high transmitting 1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark
power. on the steering column as shown. Pay
attention to the display in the instru-
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ment cluster.
objects.
2. If the vehicle key is detected:
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with metal objects. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
– Interference of the radio connection If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
from mobile phones or other electronic change the position of the vehicle key and
devices in direct proximity to the vehi- repeat the procedure.
cle key.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close Frequently Asked Questions
proximity to other electronic devices. What precautions can be taken to be able to
– Interference of radio transmission by a open a vehicle with an accidentally locked
charging process of mobile devices, for in vehicle key?
instance charging of a mobile phone. – The options provided by the Remote
– The vehicle key is in direct proximity of Services of the MINI Connected app in-
the wireless charging tray. clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-
hicle.
Place the vehicle key in a different loca-
tion. This requires an active MINI Connected
contract and the MINI Connected app
In the case of interference, the vehicle can must be installed on a smartphone.
be unlocked and locked from the outside
with the integrated key, refer to page 67. – Unlocking the vehicle can be requested
via the MINI Connected Call Center.
An active MINI Connected contract is
required.
66
Integrated key Removing
General information
The driver's door can be locked and un-
locked without the vehicle key using the
integrated key.
Safety information
Warning Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

Unlocking from the inside is only possible integrated key, arrow 2.
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the Locking/unlocking via the door
vehicle while being exposed to extreme
temperatures are at risk of injury or death. lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside 1. Remove lid on the door lock.
when there are people in it. To do this, slide the integrated key into
the opening from below and remove the
lid.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the
integrated key can be damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Remove the integrated
key before pulling the external door han-
dle.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the
vehicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the
door is opened, if the vehicle has been un-
locked via the door lock.
67
Buttons for the central locking – Back doors: pull twice on the door han-
dle on the door to be opened; the first
system time unlocks the door, the second time
opens it. The other doors remain locked.
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehi-
cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard Comfort Access
warning system and interior lights come on.
Concept
Overview The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
your pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-
cle key when it is in close proximity or in
the car's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following
Buttons for the central locking system. functions:
– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
Locking – Convenient closing.
Press the button with the front – Open the tailgate.
doors closed. – Opening/closing the tailgate with no-
– The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. touch activation.
– The vehicle is not secured against theft This function must be activated in the
when locking. settings, refer to page 78.
This function is not available in vehicles
Unlocking with a trailer hitch or with a rear lug-
gage rack preparation.
Press the button.
– To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must
Opening be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
– Press button to unlock the doors – The next unlocking and locking cycle is
together, and then pull the door handle not possible until after approx. 2 sec-
above the armrest. onds.
– Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors
remain locked.
68
Unlocking Convenient closing

Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing.
On the driver's or front passenger's outer

door handle, press the button. Closing
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 78, only the driver's door and the
fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike
when unlocking using the vehicle key,
pressing the button on the outer door han-
dle again does not unlock the other vehicle
access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked
again.
If the vehicle was locked automatically after
driving off or with the button of the central Press and hold down the button on the driv-
locking system from the inside, note the fol- er's or front passenger's outer door handle.
lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is
In addition to locking, the windows and
opened from the inside with the door
glass sunroof will be closed.
opener, pressing the button on the outer
door handle will first lock the vehicle again.
To unlock, the button on the outer door han- To open the tailgate
dle must be pressed again.
General information
Locking If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
area.
On the driver's or front passenger's outer

door handle, press the button.
69
Safety information With automatic tailgate actuation:

touchless opening and closing of
Warning tailgate
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make Concept
sure that the area of movement of the tail- The tailgate can be opened and closed with
gate is clear during opening and closing. no-touch activation using the vehicle key
you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for-
ward-directed foot motion in the central
NOTICE rear area and the tailgate is opened or
closed.
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
General information
sure that the area of movement of the tail- To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
gate is clear during opening and closing. cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
area.
This function is not available in vehicles
NOTICE with a trailer hitch or with a rear luggage
rack preparation.
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
windows and heat conductors while driv- If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the
ing. There is a risk of damage to property, tailgate may open or close inadvertently if
among other potential damage. Cover the you unintentionally move your foot or if a
edges and ensure that pointed objects do foot movement is detected.
not hit the windows. The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the
vehicle.
Opening If the tailgate is opened with no-touch acti-
vation, locked doors are not unlocked.
Contactless opening and closing of the tail-
gate must be activated in the settings.
Safety information
Warning
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts
Press button next on tailgate. may be touched, such as the hot exhaust
gas system. There is a risk of injury. When
Without automatic tailgate operation: moving your foot, make sure you have a
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung firm stance and do not touch the vehicle.
upward.
With automatic tailgate operation:
The tailgate opens automatically.
70
back. With this movement, the leg must

Warning pass through the ranges of both sensors.
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
NOTICE
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
sure that the area of movement of the tail- Opening
gate is clear during opening and closing. Perform the foot movement described ear-
lier.
Settings Before the opening, the hazard warning sys-
tem flashes.
1. "My MINI"
If touchless closing is switched on:
2. "Vehicle settings" Moving a foot again will stop the opening
3. "Doors/Key" process.
4. "Tailgate" The subsequent foot movement will close
5. Select the desired setting: the tailgate again.
– "Open by foot movement" Closing
Contactless opening of the tailgate is Perform the foot movement described ear-
switched on or off. lier.
– "Close by foot movement" Before closing, the hazard warning system
Contactless closing of the tailgate is flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
switched on or off. Moving a foot again will stop the closing
process.
Performing the foot movement
When the touchless opening is switched on:
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle the subsequent foot movement will open
at approx. one arm's length away from the tailgate again.
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the di- System limits
rection of travel and immediately pull it The detection of the foot movement may be
limited due to the following external condi-
tions:
– Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the ve-
hicle.
– Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehi-
cle.
71
Movement in the range of the sensors may Tailgate

cause unintended opening or closing of the
cargo area, for instance due to water run-
ning own when cleaning the vehicle or with General information
heavy rainfall. To prevent such unintended To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
opening or closing of the cargo area in such cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
cases, keep the vehicle key at a sufficient area.
distance from the rear of the vehicle. Depending on the equipment and country
version, it is possible to specify whether the
Malfunction tailgate can be activated with the vehicle
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may key and how the vehicle doors will respond
malfunction under the following circum- to this. To perform settings, refer to
stances: page 78.
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer Safety information
to page 65.
– Interference of the radio connection Warning
from transmission towers or other Body parts can be jammed when operating
equipment with high transmitting the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
power. sure that the area of movement of the tail-
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal gate is clear during opening and closing.
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with metal objects. NOTICE
– Interference of the radio connection The tailgate swings back and up when it
from mobile phones or other electronic opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
devices in direct proximity to the vehi- erty, among other potential damage. Make
cle key. sure that the area of movement of the tail-
Do not carry the vehicle key in close gate is clear during opening and closing.
proximity to other electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the
locking request recognition function on the NOTICE
door handles. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and windows and heat conductors while driv-
lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve- ing. There is a risk of damage to property,
hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to among other potential damage. Cover the
page 67. edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the windows.
72
Without automatic tailgate Closing

operation
Opening from the outside
Recessed grips on the interior trim of the

tailgate can be used to conveniently pull
down the tailgate.
– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle.
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- With automatic tailgate operation
cle or have the vehicle key with you.
Press button next on tailgate. Opening
– Press and hold the button on the
Adjusting the opening height
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
You can set how far the tailgate should
Depending on the setting, the doors may
open.
also be unlocked. Unlocking using the
vehicle key, refer to page 64. When adjusting the opening height, ensure
that there is a clearance of at least
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
4 in/10 cm above the tailgate.
upward.
Opening from the inside 1. "My MINI"
With Steptronic transmission: 2. "Vehicle settings"
With the vehicle stationary, pull the 3. "Doors/Key"
button in the storage compartment of the
driver's door upwards. 4. "Tailgate"
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi- 5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
tion P must be engaged first. opening height.
With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, pull the
button in the storage compartment of the
driver's door upwards twice in quick suc-
cession.
73
From the outside Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the
following situations:
– When the vehicle starts moving.
– By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the
tailgate.
– By pressing the button on the inside of
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the
tailgate.
– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. – By pressing the button on the vehicle
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- key. Pressing again continues the open-
cle or have the vehicle key with you. ing motion.
Press the button on tailgate's exterior. – By pressing or pulling the button in the
storage compartment of the driver's
– Press and hold the button on the door. Pulling again continues the open-
vehicle key for approx. 1 second. ing motion.
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking using the Closing
vehicle key, refer to page 64.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate From the outside
opens automatically to the adjusted opening Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
height.
From the inside
From the inside
Press and hold the button in the stor-
With Steptronic transmission: age compartment of the driver's door.
Pull button in the storage compart-
ment of the driver's door upward. The vehicle key must be located in the car’s
interior for this function.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-
tion P must be engaged first. An acoustic signal sounds before the tail-
gate is closed.
With manual transmission:
From inside the tailgate
With the vehicle stationary, pull the
button in the storage compartment of the Without Comfort Access:
driver's door upwards twice in quick suc-
cession.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate
opens automatically to the adjusted opening
height.
74
– By releasing the button in the storage

compartment of the driver's door. Press-
ing again and holding continues the
closing motion.
Malfunction
Safety information
Press the button on the inside of the tail- Warning

gate.
With manual operation of a blocked tail-
With Comfort Access: gate, it can release itself unexpectedly
from the blockage. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not oper-
ate the tailgate manually if it is blocked.
Have it checked by a dealer’s service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Manual operation
Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with
– Press button on the inside of the tail- a slow and smooth motion.
gate, arrow 1. To close the tailgate fully, press down
– Press button, arrow 2. lightly only. Closing occurs automatically.
The vehicle will be locked after closing
the tailgate. The driver's door must be
closed for this purpose and the vehicle Driver profiles
key must be outside of the vehicle in the
area of the tailgate. Concept
In the driver profiles, individual settings for
Interruption of the closing procedure several drivers can be stored and called up
The closing procedure is interrupted in the again when required.
– If the vehicle starts off with a jerky General information
movement. There are three driver profiles with which
– By pressing the button on the outside of personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev-
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the ery vehicle key has been assigned one of
tailgate. these driver profiles.
– By pressing the button on the inside of If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the key, the assigned personal driver profile will
tailgate. be activated. All settings stored in the
driver profile are automatically applied.
75
If several drivers use their own vehicle – Volumes, sound.

keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set- – Control Display.
tings as it is being unlocked. These settings
are also restored, if the vehicle has been – Climate control.
used in the meantime by a person with a – Navigation.
different vehicle key. – PDC Park Distance Control.
Changes to the settings are automatically – Rearview camera.
stored in the driver profile currently acti- – Head-up Display.
vated.
– MINI Driving Modes.
If another driver profile is selected via the
Central Information Display (CID), the set- – Intelligent Safety.
tings stored in it will be applied automati- – Driver's seat position, exterior mirror
cally. The new driver profile is assigned to position.
the vehicle key that is currently in use. Both the positions saved via the seat
There is an additional guest profile available memory and the last position set are
that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it saved.
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle
without changing the personal driver pro- Profile management
files.
Selecting a driver profile
Functional requirements Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif-
For the system to be able to identify the ferent driver profile may be activated. This
driver profile associated to a particular allows you to call up personal vehicle set-
driver, the detected vehicle key must be tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle
clearly allocated to the driver. with your own vehicle key.
This is the case when: Via the Central Information Display (CID):
– The driver is only carrying his or her 1. "My MINI"
own vehicle key.
2. "Driver profiles"
– The driver unlocks the vehicle.
3. Select driver profile.
– The driver gets into the vehicle through
the driver's door. 4. "OK"
– All settings stored in the selected driver
Settings profile are automatically applied.
The settings, for instance for the following – The called-up driver profile is assigned
systems and functions, are stored in the ac- to the vehicle key being used at the
tive profile. The scope of storable settings time.
depends on country and equipment. – If the driver profile is already assigned
– Unlocking and locking. to a different vehicle key, this driver
– Lights. profile will apply to both vehicle keys.
– Radio.
– Instrument cluster.
– Programmable memory buttons.
76
Using a guest profile 4. "Reset driver profile"

The guest profile is for individual settings 5. "OK"
that are stored in none of the three personal
driver profiles. Exporting driver profiles
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Most settings of the active driver profile
1. "My MINI" can be exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and re-
2. "Driver profiles"
trieving personal settings, for instance be-
3. "Drive off (guest)" fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.
4. "OK" The stored driver profiles can be taken into
another vehicle.
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is
not assigned to the vehicle key currently in Via the Central Information Display (CID):
use. 1. "My MINI"
Renaming a driver profile 2. "Driver profiles"
A personal name can be assigned to the ac- 3. Select driver profile.
tive driver profile to avoid confusion be- The driver profile marked with this
tween the driver profiles. icon can be exported.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. "Export driver profile (USB)"
1. "My MINI" Select USB storage device as needed.
2. "Driver profiles" Importing driver profiles
3. Select driver profile. Profiles stored on a USB device can be im-
The driver profile marked with this ported via the USB port.
icon can be renamed. The existing settings of the active driver
4. "Change driver profile name" profile are overwritten with the settings of
5. Enter profile name. the imported driver profile.
6. Select the icon. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
Resetting a driver profile 2. "Driver profiles"
The settings of the driver profile currently
3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
in use are reset to their factory settings.
The driver profile marked with this
icon can be overwritten.
1. "My MINI" 4. "Import driver profile (USB)"
2. "Driver profiles" Select USB storage device as needed.
3. Select driver profile. 5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
The driver profile marked with this
icon can be reset. Displaying driver profiles during start
The driver profiles can be displayed at each
startup to select the desired profile.
77
Via the Central Information Display (CID): – "Driver's door only"

1. "My MINI" Only the driver's door and the fuel
filler flap are unlocked. Pressing
2. "Driver profiles" again unlocks the entire vehicle.
3. "Show driver profiles at startup" – "All doors"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
System limits
A clear assignment between the vehicle key Tailgate
and driver may not be possible in the fol- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
lowing cases, for example.
– The passenger unlocks the vehicle with 1. "My MINI"
his or her own vehicle key, but another 2. "Vehicle settings"
person is driving. 3. "Doors/Key"
– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com-
4.
fort Access and has multiple vehicle
keys with him or her. The text next to the icon indicates the
current setting.
– The driver changes, but the vehicle is
not locked and unlocked. 5. Select the desired setting:
– Multiple vehicle keys are located out- – "Tailgate"
side of the vehicle. Depending on your vehicle's optional
features, the tailgate is either un-
locked or opened.
Settings – "Tailgate and door(s)"
Depending on your vehicle's optional
General information features, the tailgate is either un-
Depending on the package and country ver- locked or opened and the doors un-
sion, various settings are available for the locked.
vehicle key functions. – "Tailgate opens after unlocking"
These settings are stored for the driver pro- The vehicle must be unlocked before
file, refer to page 75, currently used. the tailgate can be used with the ve-
hicle key.
Unlocking – "Button lock"
It is not possible to use the tailgate
Doors via the vehicle key.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Depending on the vehicle equipment and
1. "My MINI" country version, this setting may not be of-
fered.
2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Doors/Key" Adjusting the last seat and mirror
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" position
5. Select the desired setting: Via the Central Information Display (CID):
78
1. "My MINI" Confirmation signals from the

2. "Driver profiles" vehicle
3. Select driver profile. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
The setting can be made for the 1. "My MINI"
driver profile marked with this icon. 2. "Vehicle settings"
4. "Last seat position automatic" 3. "Doors/Key"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's 4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-
seat and exterior mirrors resume their last firmation signals.
set positions.
– "Flash for lock/unlock"
The most recent position is independent of
the positions saved via the seat memory. Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
Automatic locking – With alarm system:
Via the Central Information Display (CID): "Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
1. "My MINI" the horn.
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Select the desired setting:
Alarm system
– "Lock automatically"
General information
The vehicle locks automatically after
a while if no door is opened after un- When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle
locking. alarm system reacts to the following
changes:
– "Lock after starting to drive"
– Unauthorized opening of a door, the
The vehicle locks automatically after
hood or the tailgate.
you drive off.
– Movements in the vehicle interior.
Automatic unlocking – Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance,
Via the Central Information Display (CID): during attempts at stealing a wheel or
when towing the vehicle.
1. "My MINI" – Disconnected battery voltage.
2. "Vehicle settings" – Improper use of the socket for Onboard
3. "Doors/Key" Diagnosis.
4. "Unlock at end of trip" – Locking the vehicle while a device is
connected to the socket for the OBD On-
After the engine is switched off by board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD
pressing the Start/Stop button, the Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 286.
locked vehicle is automatically un-
locked. The alarm system signals these changes vis-
ually and acoustically:
– Acoustic alarm:
79
Depending on local regulations, the Switching off the alarm, refer to page 81.
acoustic alarm may be suppressed.
– Visual alarm: Opening the tailgate with the alarm
By flashing of the hazard warning sys- system switched on
tem and headlights, where required. The tailgate can be opened even when the
Do not modify the system to ensure func- alarm system is switched on.
tion of the alarm system. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
monitored again provided the doors are
Overview locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
– Press the button on the vehicle
key and hold for at least 3 sec-
onds.
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle
Indicator light in the roof fin. key three times in succession.
Signals of the indicator lights

– The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
– Indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
Indicator light on the interior mirror.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or
Switching on/off tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-
The alarm system is switched on or off as rectly closed access points are secured.
soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi- Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or
Access. trunk lid are not correctly closed. Cor-
rectly closed access points are secured.
Opening the doors with the alarm When the still open access points are
system switched on closed, the interior motion sensor and
The alarm system is triggered when a door tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.
is opened if the door was unlocked using – The indicator light goes out after un-
the integrated key in the door lock. locking:
80
The vehicle has not been tampered with. The indicator light lights up for approx.
– The indicator light flashes after unlock- 2 seconds and then continues to flash.
ing until the engine ignition is switched The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi- sensor are switched off until the vehicle is
nutes: locked again.
An alarm has been triggered.
Switching off the alarm
Tilt alarm sensor – Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. – Unlock the vehicle with the integrated
The alarm system responds in situations key and switch on the ignition using the
such as attempts to steal a wheel or when emergency detection of the vehicle key,
the vehicle is towed. refer to page 66.
– With Comfort Access: if you have the
Interior motion sensor vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle
The windows and the glass sunroof must be using the button on the driver's side or
closed for the system to function properly. passenger side door.
Avoiding unintentional alarms

Power windows
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion General information
sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un- If an accident of a certain severity occurs,
authorized action occurred. the windows are automatically closed ex-
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: cept a gap.
– In automatic car washes.
– In duplex garages. Safety information
– During transport on trains carrying ve-
hicles, at sea or on a trailer. Warning
– With animals in the vehicle. When operating the windows, body parts
– When the vehicle is locked after start of and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
fueling. of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo-
the windows is clear during opening and
tion sensor can be switched off in such sit-
closing.
uations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior motion sensor
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 10 seconds as soon as the
vehicle is locked.
81
Overview Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re-

fer to page 64.
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to
page 69.
Jam protection system

Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
Power windows.
closed.
Safety switch. General information

If resistance or a blockage is detected while
a window is being closed, the closing action
Opening is interrupted.
– Press the switch to the resistance Safety information

point.
The window opens while the switch is Warning
being held.
Accessories on the windows such as an-
– Press the switch beyond the resist- tennas can impact jam protection. There is
ance point. a risk of injury. Do not install accessories
in the area of movement of the windows.
The window opens automatically. Press-
ing the switch again stops the motion.
Convenient opening with the vehicle key, Closing without the jam protection
refer to page 63. system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
Closing might prevent normal closing, proceed as
follows:
– Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
The window closes while the switch is point and hold it there.
being held.
The window closes with limited jam pro-
– Pull the switch beyond the resist- tection. If the closing force exceeds a
ance point. specific threshold, closing is inter-
rupted.
The window closes automatically if the
door is closed. Pulling the switch again 2. Pull the switch past the resistance
stops the motion. point again within approx. 4 seconds
and hold it there.
82
The window closes without jam protec- Initializing the system

tion. The system can be initialized when the ve-
hicle is stationary and the engine is run-
Safety switch ning.
During initialization, the affected window
General information closes without jam protection.
The safety switch can be used to prevent
children, for instance from opening and
closing the rear windows using the Warning
switches in the rear. When operating the windows, body parts
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
the safety function is switched off automati- of injury or risk of damage to property.
cally. Make sure that the area of movement of
the windows is clear during opening and
Switching on/off closing.
Press the button. 1. Open the affected window completely.

The LED lights up if the safety func-
tion is switched on. 2. Pull the switch to the resistance
point and hold.
Malfunction The window closes.
3. Continue holding the switch pulled

General information to the resistance point.
In certain situations a window can only be The window opens and closes once or
operated to a limited extent. twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-
– After a power failure during the opening ing on the vehicle's equipment.
or closing process, the a window can 4. Release switch.
only be operated to a limited extent. The
system must be initialized in this case.
– The power window motors are equipped Panoramic glass sunroof
with overheating protection. If a win-
dow is opened and closed several times
within a short period of time, the over- General information
heating protection switches the motor In the event of a severe accident, the glass
off temporarily. Depending on the de- sunroof is automatically closed.
gree of overheating, it may only be pos-
sible to close the window or it may not
be possible to operate it at all.
In this case: allow the power window
motor to cool down.
83
Safety information With the glass sunroof completely

raised
Warning – Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. The glass sunroof is
Make sure that the area of movement of opened as long as the
the glass sunroof is clear during opening switch is pressed.
and closing. – Press the switch back beyond the resist-
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Overview
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof
is not fully open. In these models, the auto-
matic function initially only opens the glass
sunroof up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass
sunroof fully.
Tilting the glass sunroof
Press back the switch up to or Closing glass sunroof
beyond the resistance point
and release it. With the glass sunroof open
The glass sunroof is raised. – Slide switch forward to the
resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is closed
Opening glass sunroof as long as the switch is
pressed and stops in the
When the glass sunroof is closed raised position.
Press the switch back beyond – Press the switch forward beyond the re-
the resistance point and resistance point and release it.
lease it twice. The glass sunroof is closed and stops in
The glass sunroof is opened. the raised position.
Pressing the switch again Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
stops the motion. tion.
– Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it twice.
The glass sunroof is closed.
84
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-

tion.
With the glass sunroof completely

raised
Press the switch forward be- 1. Push the switch forward past the resist-
yond the resistance point and ance point and hold it.
release it. The glass sunroof closes with limited
The glass sunroof is closed. jam protection. If the closing force ex-
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-
terrupted.
Opening/closing the sun protection 2. Push the switch forward again past the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power

interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. The system
Use the handle to slide the sun protection must be initialized in this case. MINI rec-
into the desired position. ommends having this work performed only
by a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts from becoming jammed between the
roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-
roof is closing.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while
the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-
ing action is interrupted.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection

system
If there is an external danger, proceed as
follows:
85
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- With a backrest inclined too far to the
specific and optional features offered with rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no
the series. It also describes features and longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid-
functions that are not necessarily available ing under the safety belt in an accident.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
tions or country versions. This also applies Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.
to safety-related functions and systems. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
When using these functions and systems, most upright position as possible and do
the applicable laws and regulations must be not adjust again while driving.
observed.
Warning
Sitting safely There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of damage to property. Make sure that the
of the occupants can make a vital contribu- area of movement of the seat is clear prior
tion to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. to any adjustment.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat
position plays an important role. Follow the
information in the following chapters:
Manually adjustable seats
– Seats, refer to page 86. Overview
– Safety belts, refer to page 90.
– Head restraints, refer to page 92.
– Airbags, refer to page 158.
Front seats
Safety information
1 Forward/backward
Warning
2 Thigh support
Seat setting while driving can lead to un-
3 Height
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of ac- 4 Backrest tilt
cident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
86
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Forward/backward Backrest tilt
Warning
Unexpected movements of the seat while
driving may occur if the seat is unlocked.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of accident. After adjusting, move the
seat forward or back slightly, making sure
the seat engages properly.
Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the

backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-
sired direction.
Height
Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-

crease the curvature.
Electrically adjustable seats

Pull the lever up or press it down as often as General information
needed to reach the desired height.
The seat setting for the driver's seat is
stored for the profile currently used. When
the vehicle is unlocked via the vehicle key,
the position is automatically retrieved if the
function, refer to page 78, is activated for
this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored us-
ing the memory function, refer to page 94.
87
Overview Seat tilt
1 Memory function Tilt switch up or down.

2 Lumbar support
3 Backrest tilt Backrest tilt
4 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
Forward/backward
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Lumbar support
Press switch forward or backward.
Concept
The curvature of the seat backrest can be
Height adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Adjusting
– Press the front/rear sec-
tion of the button:
The curvature is in-
creased/decreased.
– Press the upper/lower sec-
Press switch up or down.
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted
up/down.
88
Thigh support Switching off

Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Rear seats
Safety information
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad- Warning
just the thigh support. There is a risk of jamming when folding
down the center armrest in the rear. There
Front seat heating is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area
of movement of the center armrest is clear
Overview during folding down.
Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
backrest while driving may occur due to
unintentional unlocking of the rear seat
backrests by the straps. There is a risk of
injury. Only use straps for releasing the
rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects
on the straps.
Seat heating
Forward/backward
Switching on
General information
Press the button once for each tem-
perature level. The rear seat is divided at a ratio of 60 to
40. The left seat is connected to the center
The maximum temperature is reached when
section.
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx.
15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is
switched on automatically with the temper-
ature selected last.
When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to
page 246, the heating output is reduced.
89
Adjusting Always make sure that safety belts are be-

ing worn by all occupants before driving off.
Although airbags enhance safety by provid-
ing added protection, they do not replace
safety belts.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the
rear from the belt buckle on the side.
All belt fastening points are designed to
achieve the best possible protective effect
of the safety belts with proper use of the
safety belts and correct seat setting. Follow
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-
notes on sitting safely, refer to page 86.
sired direction.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
After releasing the lever, move the seat for-
seat are intended for the persons sitting on
ward and back slightly, making sure it en-
the left and right.
gages properly.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear
seat is intended for the person sitting in the
Backrest tilt middle.
Safety information
Warning
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
one person will potentially defeat the abil-
ity of the safety belt to serve its protective
function. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-
Pull the strap and apply your weight to the son to wear a single safety belt. Infants
backrest or lift it off, as necessary. and children are not allowed on an occu-
After the adjustment, move the backrest pant's lap, but must be transported and se-
slightly forward or back to engage it cor- cured in designated child restraint sys-
rectly. tems.
Warning
Safety belts
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, can be limited or lost when
General information safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause
ensure occupant safety. However, they can additional injuries, for instance in the
only unfold their protective effect when ad- event of an accident, braking or evasive
justed correctly. maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
90
danger to life. Make sure that all occu- 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety
pants are wearing safety belts correctly. belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must
engage audibly.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or
fail in the following situations:
– The safety belts or safety belt buckles
are damaged, soiled, or changed in
any other way.
– Belt tensioners or belt retractors
were modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged
Unbuckling the safety belt
in the event of an accident. There is a risk 1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-
sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-
keep them clean. Have the safety belts up mechanism.
checked after an accident at the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service Middle safety belt in the rear
Buckling the safety belt
Correct use of safety belts

– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight
to your body over your lap and should-
ers.
– Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not
press on your stomach.
– Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across 1. Pull the buckle tongues out of the
hard or fragile objects. mounts in the roof.
– Avoid thick clothing. 2. Insert the lower buckle tongue in the
– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up- belt buckle, arrow 1.
ward around your upper body. 3. Insert the upper buckle tongue in the
belt buckle, arrow 2.
Buckling the safety belt Safety belt buckles must audibly click
1. Guide the safety belt slowly over into place.
shoulder and hip to put it on.
91
Unbuckling the safety belt – Adjust the head restraint so its center
1. Hold the safety belt firmly. supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
– Adjust the distance so that the head
3. Use the buckle tongue, arrow 1, to open restraint is as close as possible to the
the second safety belt buckle, arrow 2. back of the head. Adjust the distance
via the backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
4. Guide the safety belt to the mount in the

roofliner. Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
Safety belt reminder for driver's protective effect in the head and neck
seat and front passenger seat area. There is a risk of injury.
– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
Display in the instrument cluster ers.
The indicator light lights up and a – Do not hang objects, for instance
signal sounds. Make sure that the clothes hangers, directly on the head
safety belts are positioned correctly. restraint.
The safety belt reminder can also be acti- – Only use accessories that have been
vated if objects are placed on the front pas- determined to be safe for attachment
senger seat. to a head restraint.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Front head restraints
Adjusting the height: John Cooper
Safety information Works sport seat
The height of the head restraints cannot be
Warning set.
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head
restraints can cause injuries in the head
and neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
92
Adjusting the height Rear head restraints

Safety information
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head
restraints can cause injuries in the head
and neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and head restraints on the occupied seats.
push the head restraint down. – Adjust the head restraint so its center
– To raise: push the head restraint up. supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly. – Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head. Adjust the distance
Removing: John Cooper Works via the backrest tilt as needed.
sport seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Warning
Removing Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Only remove the head restraint if no one
Make sure that the area of movement is
will be sitting in the seat in question.
clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
– Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
ers.
1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest – Do not hang objects, for instance
forward. clothes hangers, directly on the head
restraint.
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible.
– Only use accessories that have been
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the determined to be safe for attachment
head restraint out completely. to a head restraint.
– Do not use any accessories, for in-
Installing stance pillows, while driving.
Proceed in the reverse order to install the
head restraint.
93
Adjusting the height Memory function

Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory
function:
– Seat position.
– Exterior mirror position.
– Height of the Head-up Display.
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down. General information
– To raise: push the head restraint up. Different settings can be assigned to two
After setting the height, make sure that the memory locations.
head restraint engages correctly. The setting of the lumbar support is not
stored.
Fold down Safety information
Warning
There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment.
– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,

and press down the head restraint, ar- Warning
row 2. Using the memory function while driving
– Forward: fold the head restraint toward can lead to unexpected movements of the
the front as far as it will go. Make sure seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
that the head restraint engages cor- a risk of accident. Only retrieve the mem-
rectly. ory function when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Removing
The head restraints cannot be removed.
94
Overview Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver
profile currently in use. When the vehicle is
unlocked via the vehicle key, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer
Storing to page 78, is activated for this purpose.
1. Switch on the ignition. The current exterior mirror position can be
2. Set the desired position. stored using the memory function, refer to
page 94.
3. Press the button. The LED in the
button lights up. Safety information
4. Press the desired button 1 or 2 while the
LED is lit. The LED goes out. Warning
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
Calling up settings than they appear. The distance to the traf-
The stored position is called up automati- fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,
cally. for instance while changing lanes. There is
Press the desired button 1 or 2. a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to
The procedure stops when a seat setting the traffic behind by looking over your
switch or one of the memory buttons is shoulder.
pressed.
Once underway, adjustment of the seat po- Overview
sition on the driver's side is disabled after a
short while.
Call up deactivated
After a brief period, calling up stored seat
positions is deactivated to save battery
power.
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
– Open or close the door or tailgate.
– Press a button on the vehicle key. 1 Adjusting
– Press the Start/Stop button. 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
3 Folding in and out
95
Selecting a mirror Deactivating

To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir-
Slide the switch. ror position.
Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Adjusting electrically
Press the button. Flip lever
The mirror movement follows the
button movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust
the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-
ror glass.
Automatic heating
To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
Both exterior mirrors are automatically mirror, flip the lever forward.
heated as needed and when the ignition is
switched on.
Turn button
Automatic dimming feature
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is
automatically dimmed. Photocells in the
car's interior mirror, refer to page 97, are
used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior

mirror
Concept Turn the button to reduce the blinding ef-
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass fect by the interior mirror.
on the front passenger side is tilted down-
ward. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking,
for instance.
Activating
1. slide the switch to the driver's
side mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
96
Interior mirror, automatic dimming Adjusting

feature
Overview
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat
Photocells are used for control: position.
– In the mirror glass. 3. Fold the lever back up.
– On the back of the mirror.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
– Keep the photocells clean.
– Do not cover the area between the inte-
rior mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning Heated steering wheel

Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost. Switching on/off
There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the Press the button.
steering wheel while the vehicle is sta-
tionary only.
– On: the LED lights up.
– Off: the LED goes out.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after an intermediate stop, the heated
steering wheel switches on automatically if
the function was switched on at the end of
the last trip.
97
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- A heated vehicle may result in death to
specific and optional features offered with persons, especially children, or animals.
the series. It also describes features and There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
functions that are not necessarily available Do not leave persons, especially children,
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- or animals unattended in the vehicle.
When using these functions and systems, Warning
the applicable laws and regulations must be Exposure to intense sunlight can cause
observed. child restraint systems and their compo-
nents to become very hot. Persons may
sustain burn injuries when touching the
The right place for children hot components. There is a risk of injury.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
Safety information direct sunlight or cover where necessary.
If necessary, let the child restraint system
cool down before transporting a child. Do
Warning not leave children unattended in the vehi-
Unattended children or animals in the ve- cle.
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
stance due to the following actions: Transport children in the rear seat
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
General information
Accident research shows that the safest
– Opening and closing the doors or place for children is in the rear seat.
windows.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
– Engaging selector lever position N. shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be trans-
– Using vehicle equipment. ported in the rear seat in suitable child re-
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do straint systems designed for the age, weight
not leave children or animals unattended and size of the child. Children 13 years of
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with age or older must wear a safety belt as soon
you when exiting and lock the vehicle. as a suitable child restraint system can no
longer be used due to their age, weight, or
size.
98
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Safety information
Warning
Warning The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor- seat setting or improper installation of the
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
150 cm without suitable additional child danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
restraint systems. The efficacy of safety straint system fits securely against the
gear, including safety belts, can be limited backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
or lost when safety belts are fastened in- tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
belt can cause additional injuries, for in- backrests are securely engaged or locked.
stance in the event of an accident, braking If possible, adjust the height of the head
or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- restraints or remove them.
juries or danger to life. Secure children
shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.
Installing child restraint sys-
Children on the front passenger tems
seat
General information
General information Pay attention to the specifications of the
Before using a child restraint system on the child restraint system manufacturer when
front passenger seat, ensure that the front, selecting, installing, and using child re-
knee, and side airbags on the front passen- straint systems.
ger side are deactivated. For automatic de-
activation of front-seat passenger airbags, Safety information
refer to page 160.
Safety information Warning

The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which
Warning have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot
jure a child in a child restraint system be properly restrained in the event of an
when the airbags are activated. There is a accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
risk of injury. Make sure that the front- There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and Do not use child restraint systems which
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
tor light lights up. dent.
If a child restraint system and its fasten-
ing system has been damaged or exposed
to an accident, have these systems
checked and replaced by the dealer's serv-
99
ice center or another qualified service cen- Seat position and height
ter or repair shop. After installing a child restraint system,
move the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and adjust its height to the highest
Warning and thus best possible position for the belt
The stability of the child restraint system and to offer optimal protection in the event
is limited or compromised with incorrect of an accident.
seat setting or improper installation of the If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is
child seat. There is a risk of injuries or located in front of the belt guide of the child
danger to life. Make sure that the child re- seat, move the front passenger seat care-
straint system fits securely against the fully forward until the best possible belt
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest guide position is reached.
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and Child seat security
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
On the rear seats

If the vehicle is equipped with a sliding rear
seat row: move the seats to the rearmost po-
sition before mounting a child restraint sys-
tem.
The rear safety belts and the front passen-
On the front passenger seat ger safety belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Deactivating airbags
Locking the safety belt
Warning 1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- 2. Secure the child restraint system with
jure a child in a child restraint system the safety belt.
when the airbags are activated. There is a 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and
risk of injury. Make sure that the front- pull it tight against the child restraint
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and system. The safety belt is disabled.
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
tor light lights up.
Unlocking the safety belt
Before installing a child restraint system in 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
the front passenger seat, make sure that the 2. Remove the child restraint system.
front, knee and side airbags on the front
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
passenger side are deactivated.
pletely.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 160.
100
In some cases it may be necessary to sepa-

rate the lower belt attachment. Safety belts, Warning
refer to page 90. The attachment points for child restraint
systems in the vehicle are intended for at-
taching child restraint systems only.
LATCH child restraint fixing When other objects are mounted, the an-
system chors can be damaged. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. At-
tach only child restraint systems at the
General information corresponding attachment points.
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Pay attention to the operating and safety in- Position
formation from the child restraint system
manufacturer when installing and using Icon Meaning
LATCH child restraint fixing systems. The corresponding icon
shows the mounts for the
Mounts for the lower LATCH lower LATCH anchors.
anchors Seats equipped with lower
anchors are marked with a
General information pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.
The lower anchors may be used to attach For vehicles equipped with
the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com- a middle seat:
bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg It is not recommended to
when the child is restrained by the internal use the inner lower anchors
harnesses. of standard outer LATCH
positions to fasten a child
Safety information restraint system on the
middle seat. Use the vehicle
Warning safety belt instead for the
middle seat.
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys-
tems are not correctly engaged, the protec-
tive effect of the LATCH child restraint Before installing LATCH child
fixing system is limited. There is a risk of restraint fixing systems
injuries or danger to life. Make sure that Pull the safety belt away from the area of
the lower anchors are securely engaged the child restraint system.
and that the LATCH child restraint fixing
system fits securely against the backrest. Assembly of LATCH child restraint
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manu-
facturer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are
properly engaged.
101
Child restraint systems with tether the rear seat backrest or the rear window
strap shelf.
Safety information Routing the retaining strap
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the
protective effect is reduced. There is a risk
of injury. Make sure that the upper retain-
ing strap does not run over sharp edges
and is not twisted as it passes the upper
anchor.
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
Warning
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-
4 Anchor
tective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or there is none. In certain situa- 5 Seat backrest
tions, for instance braking maneuvers or 6 Upper retaining strap
in case of an accident, the rear backrest
can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Make sure that the rear Attaching the upper retaining strap to
backrests are locked. the anchor
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-
Warning ing strap between or along both sides of
The attachment points for child restraint the supports of the head restraint to the
systems in the vehicle are intended for at- anchor.
taching child restraint systems only. 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
When other objects are mounted, the an- the anchor on the rear seat.
chors can be damaged. There is a risk of 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
injury or risk of damage to property. At- down.
tach only child restraint systems at the
corresponding attachment points.
Anchors
The respective icon shows the an-
chor for the upper retaining strap.
Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this icon. It can be found on
102
Locking the doors and win-

dows
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out-
side only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's
door if children are being trans-
ported in the rear.
This locks various functions so that they
cannot be operated from the rear: safety
switch, refer to page 83.
103
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and options To save battery power when the engine is
off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
sary electrical consumers.
Ignition off
functions that are not necessarily available Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- button again without stepping on the clutch
tions or country versions. This also applies pedal.
to safety-related functions and systems. Steptronic transmission: shift to selector
When using these functions and systems, lever position P, press the Start/Stop button
the applicable laws and regulations must be again without stepping on the brake.
observed. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster
go out.
To save battery power when the engine is
Start/Stop button off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
sary electrical consumers.
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button Safety measures
switches the ignition on or off The ignition is switched off automatically in
and starts the engine. the following situations while the vehicle is
Steptronic transmission: the stationary and the engine is off:
engine starts in selector lever – When locking the vehicle, even if the
position P or N with the brake pedal pressed low beams are switched on.
when you press the Start/Stop button. – Shortly before the battery is discharged
Manual transmission: the engine starts with completely, so that the engine can still
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/ be started. This function is only availa-
Stop button is pressed. ble when the low beams are switched
off.
– When opening or closing the driver
Ignition on door, if the driver's safety belt is un-
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop buckled and the low beams are switched
button without stepping on the clutch off.
pedal.
– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/ led with driver's door open and low
Stop button, but do not press on the brake beams off.
pedal at the same time.
– When the front doors are opened if
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. there is no other person sitting in the
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the front seats.
instrument cluster light up for a varied
length of time.
104
Driving CONTROLS
– The low beams switch to parking lights – Shortly before the battery is discharged
after some minutes of no use. completely, so that the engine can still
Steptronic transmission with a tap-operated be started.
selector lever, refer to page 121: when
switching off the ignition, the selector lever
position P is engaged automatically if the Starting the engine
selector lever position R, D or M/S is en-
gaged. Safety information
Radio-ready state
DANGER
General information If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
In the radio-ready state, certain electrical tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
consumers remain ready for operation. can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust
gases contain pollutants which are color-
Activating less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
With the engine running, press the Start/ the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
Stop button. the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
If the engine is not running and the ignition ventilation.
is switched on: the system automatically ac-
tivates radio-ready state when the door is
opened if the lights are switched off or the Warning
daytime running lights are switched on.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Radio-ready state remains active if, for in- and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
stance the ignition is automatically accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
switched off for the following reasons: cle against rolling.
– Opening or closing the driver's door. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
– When automatically switching from low lowing:
beams to parking lights. – Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
Switching off automatically slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
The radio-ready state is switched off auto- rection of the curb.
matically in the following situations: – On uphill grades or on a downhill
– If the driver's or front passenger door is slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
opened when exiting the vehicle, with stance with a wheel chock.
the engine switched off manually.
– If the ignition is switched off manually
with the Start/Stop button. NOTICE
– After approx. 8 minutes. Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or
– When the vehicle is locked using the repeated starting of the vehicle in rapid
central locking system. succession can cause the starter to over-
heat. This also results in unburned or inad-
105
CONTROLS Driving
equately burned fuel, and can cause the Engine stop

catalytic converter to overheat. There is a
potential damage. Avoid repeated starting Safety information
of the vehicle, particularly repeated start-
ing in rapid succession. Warning
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
Gasoline engine hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
Depending on the motorization, the full stance due to the following actions:
drive power may not be available for ap-
proximately 30 seconds after starting the – Pressing the Start/Stop button.
engine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac- – Releasing the parking brake.
celerate as usual. – Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
Steptronic transmission – Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
Starting the engine
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
1. Depress the brake pedal. not leave children or animals unattended
2. Engage selector lever position P or N. in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
3. Press the Start/Stop button. you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts. Warning
Manual transmission and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
Starting the engine cle against rolling.
1. Depress the brake pedal. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to lowing:
neutral.
– Set the parking brake.
The ignition is activated automatically for a slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en- rection of the curb.
gine starts.
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
106
Driving CONTROLS
Steptronic transmission Engine stop

Switching off the engine Functional requirements
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply The engine is switched off automatically
the parking brake. during a stop under the following condi-
2. Engage selector lever position P. tions:
Manual transmission:
– Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal
The engine is switched off.
is not pressed.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Manual transmission
Steptronic transmission:
Switching off the engine – The selector lever is in selector lever po-
sition D.
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button. – The brake pedal remains depressed
while the vehicle is stopped.
The engine is switched off.
– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
The radio-ready state is switched on.
driver's door is closed.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse. In order to be able to release the brake
3. Set the parking brake. pedal, engage the selector lever in position
P. The engine remains off.
To continue driving depress the brake
Auto Start/Stop function pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine
starts automatically.
Concept The air flow from the air conditioner is re-
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save duced when the engine is switched off.
fuel. The system switches off the engine
during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or Steptronic transmission: manual
at traffic lights. The ignition remains engine stop
switched on. The engine starts automati- Depending on the vehicle equipment and
cally for driving off. country version, the engine can be switched
After each engine start using the Start/Stop off manually, if the engine was not switched
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is off automatically when the vehicle stopped:
ready and is activated at speeds faster than – Press the brake pedal forcefully again
about 3 mph/5 km/h. from the current pedal position.
Depending on the selected drive mode, refer – Engage selector lever position P.
to page 184, the system is automatically ac- If all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
tivated or deactivated. the engine switches off.
107
CONTROLS Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster – Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on.
Instrument cluster without enhanced – The vehicle battery charge is very low.
features: display
– At higher elevations.
The display indicates that the – The hood is unlocked.
Auto Start/Stop function is
ready for an Automatic engine – The parking assistant is activated.
start. – Stop-and-go traffic.
– Selector lever in selector lever position
R, N or M/S.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic
engine stop have not been Starting the engine
met. The engine starts automatically under the
following conditions:
– Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
Instrument cluster with enhanced pressed.
features: display – Steptronic transmission: by releasing
The display indicates that the the brake pedal.
Auto Start/Stop function is After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
ready for an Automatic engine
start. Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically,
The display indicates that the it will not start again automatically if any
conditions for an automatic one of the following conditions are met:
engine stop have not been – The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
met. the driver's door is open.
– The hood was unlocked.
Functional limitations Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine is not switched off automatically
in the following situations: The engine can only be started via the
Start/Stop button.
– Outside temperature too low.
– The outside temperature is high and au- Functional limitations
tomatic climate control is running. Even if driving off was not intended, the de-
– The car's interior has not yet been activated engine starts up automatically in
heated or cooled to the required level. the following situations:
– The engine is not yet at operating tem- – Excessive warming of the car's interior
perature. when air conditioning is switched on.
– The wheels are at a sharp angle or the – When the steering wheel is turned.
steering wheel is being turned. – Steptronic transmission: change from
– After driving in reverse. selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
108
Driving CONTROLS
– Steptronic transmission: change from Switching the system on/off

selector lever position P to R, N, D or
M/S. Using the button
– The vehicle begins rolling.
– Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on.
– The vehicle battery charge is very low.
– Excessive cooling of the car's interior
when the heating is switched on.
– Manual transmission: low brake vacuum
pressure; this can occur, for instance if
the brake pedal is depressed a number
of times in succession. Press the button.
Additional Auto Start/Stop – LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function

function is deactivated.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and The engine is started during an auto-
country-specific version, the vehicle fea- matic engine stop.
tures a variety of sensors for assessing the The engine can only be stopped or
traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop func- started via the Start/Stop button.
tion uses this information to adapt to vari-
ous traffic situations in a proactive manner. – LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function
is activated.
For instance, this applies to the following
situations: Switching off the vehicle during an
– When a situation is detected in which automatic engine stop
the stopping time is expected to be very
short, the engine is not switched off au- During an automatic engine stop, the vehi-
tomatically. A message appears on the cle can be switched off permanently, for in-
Control Display, depending on the situa- stance when leaving it.
tion. Steptronic transmission:
– When a situation is detected in which 1. Engage selector lever position P.
the vehicle needs to drive off immedi-
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition
ately, the engine is started automati-
is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop
cally.
The function may be restricted if the navi-
gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail- 3. Set the parking brake.
able, for example. Manual transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition
is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
109
CONTROLS Driving
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.

Warning
Automatic deactivation Unattended children or animals in the ve-
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
function is deactivated automatically for endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
safety reasons, for instance if no driver is stance due to the following actions:
detected. – Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Malfunction
– Opening and closing the doors or
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer windows.
switches off the engine automatically. A
Check Control message is displayed. It is – Engaging selector lever position N.
possible to continue driving. Have the sys- – Using vehicle equipment.
tem checked by a dealer's service center or There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
another qualified service center or repair not leave children or animals unattended
shop. in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
Parking brake, electric

Overview
Concept
The parking brake is used to prevent the ve-
hicle from rolling when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of Parking brake
cle against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- Setting
lowing: With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
slope, turn the front wheels in the di- The LED lights up.
rection of the curb.
The indicator light lights up red. The
– On uphill grades or on a downhill parking brake is set.
stance with a wheel chock. Depending on the stopping situation, the
parking brake is engaged automatically.
110
Driving CONTROLS
Steptronic transmission: in some parking – Engine on.

situations, the parking brake is automati- – Gear position engaged.
cally engaged, when selector lever posi-
tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park- – Driver buckled in and doors closed.
ing brake is released automatically when
you leave the selector lever position P. Automatic release in cars with manual
transmission
While driving Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen-
To use as emergency brake while driving: gages when the clutch pedal is released.
The LED and indicator light go out.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
brakes hard while the switch is being Under the following conditions, the parking
pulled. brake is automatically released:
– Engine on.
The indicator light lights up red, a – Gear engaged.
signal sounds and the brake lights
light up. – Driver buckled in and doors closed.
A Check Control message is displayed. – Engine power is sufficient to drive off.
If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete Malfunction

stop, the parking brake is engaged. If the parking brake fails or malfunctions,
secure the vehicle against rolling before ex-
Releasing iting.
Releasing manually
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for
1. Switch on the ignition. instance with a wheel chock, after exiting
the vehicle.
2. Manual transmission: press the
switch while the brake pedal is pressed.
After a power failure
Steptronic transmission: press the
switch while the brake is pressed or se- Re-activating the parking brake
lector lever position P is set. 1. Switch on the ignition.
The LED and indicator light go out.
2. Press the switch while stepping on
The parking brake is released. the brake pedal or selector lever posi-
tion P is set.
Automatic release in cars with
Steptronic transmission It may take several seconds for the brake to
be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as-
For automatic release, step on the accelera- sociated with this process are normal.
tor pedal.
The indicator light in the instrument
The LED and indicator light go out. cluster goes out as soon as the park-
The parking brake is automatically released ing brake is ready for operation.
when you step on the accelerator under the
following conditions:
111
CONTROLS Driving
Turn signal, high beams, head- Malfunction

light flasher Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has
failed.
Turn signal
High beams, headlight flasher
Using turn signals
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
Press the lever past the resistance point.

– High beams on, arrow 1.
Canada: the lever returns into its starting
position after actuation. To switch off man- The high beams light up when the low
ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance beams are switched on.
point. – High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
Triple turn signal activation
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be ad-
Wiper system
justed.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): General information
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
1. "My MINI" dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
2. "Vehicle settings" cause them to become worn more quickly.
3. "Lighting"
Safety information
4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
Settings are stored for the profile currently away state, body parts can be jammed or
used. damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
Signaling briefly to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
Press the lever to the resistance point and switched off when the wipers are in the
hold it there for as long as you want the folded away state and the wipers are
turn signal to flash. folded in when switching on.
112
Driving CONTROLS

NOTICE – Switching off: press the lever down until
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, it reaches its standard position.
the wiper blades can be torn off and the – Brief wipe: press the lever down from
wiper motor can overheat when switching the standard position.
on. There is a risk of damage to property,
The lever automatically returns to its in-
among other potential damage. Defrost the
itial position when released.
windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Interval mode or rain sensor
Switching on Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
Press the lever up until the desired position
Safety information
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers, posi-
tion 0. NOTICE
– Intermittent operation or rain sensor, If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
position 1. can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
– Normal wiper speed, position 2.
erty, among other potential damage. Deac-
– Fast wiper speed, position 3. tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper
system switched on: when travel continues,
the wipers resume at their previous speed. Activating
Press the lever up once from its standard

position, arrow 1.
113
CONTROLS Driving
Wiping is started. cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. freeze, if needed.
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
not start.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
Deactivating
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
Press the lever back into the standard posi- There is a risk of damage to property,
tion. among other potential damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of reservoir is empty.
the rain sensor
Turn the thumbwheel.

With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-
val. Pull the lever.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- The system sprays washer fluid on the
sor sensitivity. windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor. Windshield washer nozzles
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the The washer jets are automatically heated
rain sensor. whenever the ignition is switched on.
Windshield washer system Rear window wiper

Overview
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
114
Driving CONTROLS
Switching on folded away state and the wipers are

Turn the outer switch upward. folded in when switching on.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
tion 0.
NOTICE
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
verse gear is engaged, the system If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
switches to continuous operation. the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
Clean the rear window on. There is a risk of damage to property,
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc- windshield prior to switching the wipers
tion. on.
– In resting position: turn the switch
downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position Folding away the wipers
when released. 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch 2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-
further, arrow 2. The switch automati- til the wipers stop in a close to vertical
cally returns to its interval position position.
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
to be folded away from the windshield.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
General information
the windshield.
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
away state, body parts can be jammed or
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is Folding down the wipers
switched off when the wipers are in the After the wipers are folded back down, the
wiper system must be reactivated.
115
CONTROLS Driving
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the Switching on

windshield.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation.
Canada: wiper system

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-
General information ance point.
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly. – Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
Safety information The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Warning Switching off and brief wipe
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
NOTICE Press the lever down.

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, – To switch off from fast wiper speed:
the wiper blades can be torn off and the press down twice.
wiper motor can overheat when switching – To switch off from normal wiper speed:
on. There is a risk of damage to property, press down once.
among other potential damage. Defrost the – Brief wipe: press down once.
windshield prior to switching the wipers
on. The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
116
Driving CONTROLS
Interval mode or rain sensor Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset. Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-
Safety information val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
NOTICE sor sensitivity.
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
can accidentally start moving in vehicle rain sensor.
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop- Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
erty, among other potential damage. Deac- rain sensor.
tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Windshield washer system

Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze, if needed.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. NOTICE
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
not start. the wash pump cannot work as intended.
If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen- There is a risk of damage to property,
sor switched on: if the trip is resumed among other potential damage. Do not use
within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor the washer system when the washer fluid
is automatically activated again. reservoir is empty.
117
CONTROLS Driving
Cleaning the windshield – In resting position: turn the switch

downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Pull the lever.
Fold-away position of the wipers
The system sprays washer fluid on the
windshield and activates the wipers briefly. Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
Windshield washer nozzles to be folded away from the windshield.
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on. General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
Rear window wiper under frosty conditions, for instance.
Overview Safety information
Warning
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
Switching on
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi- NOTICE
tion 0. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- the wiper blades can be torn off and the
verse gear is engaged, the system wiper motor can overheat when switching
switches to continuous operation. on. There is a risk of damage to property,
Clean the rear window windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
118
Driving CONTROLS
Folding away the wipers Washer fluid

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up past the point General information
of resistance and hold it for approx. All washer nozzles are supplied from one
3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a reservoir.
nearly vertical position.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze
can be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield. Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-
ful substances and are flammable. There is
a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow
the instructions on the containers. Keep
antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do
not refill operating materials into different
bottles. Store operating materials out of
reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-
tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many
individual states; do not exceed the allow-
able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that
Folding down the wipers apply. Follow the usage instructions on the
After the wipers are folded back down, the washer fluid container.
wiper system must be reactivated. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the centrate or the equivalent is recom-
windshield. mended.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return Warning
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation. Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-
gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the
lid of the washer fluid reservoir.
119
CONTROLS Driving
Manual transmission
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer Safety information
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the
windows can lead to damage to the wash-
ing system. There is a risk of damage to Warning
property, among other potential damage. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Do not add silicon-containing additives to and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
the washer fluid. accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
NOTICE cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
Mixing different windshield washer con- lowing:
centrates or antifreeze can damage the – Set the parking brake.
washing system. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential dam-
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
age. Do not mix different windshield
washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow
the information and mixing ratios pro- – On uphill grades or on a downhill
vided on the containers. slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
Overview
NOTICE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a
potential damage. When shifting into 5th
or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the
right.
Schematic diagram
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures
below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
– 1–6: forward gears.
120
Driving CONTROLS
– R: reverse gear. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

lowing:
Shifting
General information – On uphill grades or on a downhill
Depending on the motorization, the engine slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
speed during a shifting operation is ad-
justed automatically as required for harmo- – On uphill grades or on a downhill
nious gear shifting. slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Selector lever version
To overcome the resistance push the gear-
shift lever dynamically to the left and en- General information
gage reverse gear with a forward shifting Depending on the vehicle equipment, a
movement. transmission with either a latching selector
lever or a tap-operated selector lever is in-
Rolling or pushing the vehicle stalled.
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll
without its own power, for instance in a car Transmission with a latching selector
wash, or be pushed. lever
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out
of a forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission
Concept The selector lever positions P, R, N, and D
The Steptronic transmission combines the are selected by moving the selector lever
functions of an automatic transmission with into the respective selector lever position.
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed. The selector lever engages in the selector
lever positions.
Safety information
Warning
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
121
CONTROLS Driving
Transmission with tap-operated The transmission blocks the drive wheels in

selector lever selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that
selector lever position P is set. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to move.
Automatic parking position for a

transmissions with tap-operated selector
lever
The selector lever positions R, N, and D are Selector lever position P is engaged auto-
selected by tapping the selector lever for- matically in situations such as the follow-
ward or back. The selector lever automati- ing:
cally returns to the center position when re- – After the engine is switched off when
leased. the vehicle is in the radio-ready state,
The selector lever position P is engaged by refer to page 105, or when the ignition
pressing the P button on the selector lever is switched off, refer to page 104, while
or, in certain situations, automatically, refer selector lever position R, D or M/S is en-
to page 122. gaged.
– If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,
the driver's door is opened, and the
Selector lever positions brake pedal is not pressed while the ve-
hicle is stationary and selector lever po-
Drive mode D sition D, M/S or R is engaged.
Selector lever position for normal vehicle – After the ignition has been switched off
operation. All gears for forward travel are while selector lever position N is en-
activated automatically. gaged.
R is reverse Engaging selector lever positions:

Engage selector lever position R only when with a latching selector lever
General information
Neutral N To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without you select a gear position, maintain pres-
engine power in selector lever position N, sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to to start.
page 124.
Parking position P The selector lever can only be taken out of
selector lever position P if the ignition is on
General information
or the engine is running.
Selector lever position, for instance for
parking the vehicle.
122
Driving CONTROLS
Engaging selector lever position D, N, Engaging selector lever positions:

R, or P with a tap-operated selector lever
With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of selector General information
lever position P or N; otherwise, the shift To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
block will not be deactivated and the shift you select a gear position, maintain pres-
command will not be executed. sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
A selector lever lock prevents the following to start.
faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector Functional requirements
lever position P or R. Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it
– Unintentional shifting from selector possible to change from selector lever posi-
lever position P into another selector tion P to another selector lever position.
lever position. Depending on the transmission version, the
1. To release the selector lever lock: with engine may have to be running too.
the brake pedal depressed, press the The selection lever position P cannot be
button on the front of the selector lever. changed until all technical requirements are
met.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,

R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector
lever position R.
– Unintentional shifting from selector
2. Move the selector lever into the desired lever position P into another selector
position. lever position.
1. Press and hold the button to release the
selector lever lock.
2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,

briefly push the selector lever in the de-
sired direction, past a resistance point,
123
CONTROLS Driving
if needed. The selector lever automati- If there is a malfunction, you may not be
cally returns to the center position when able to change the selector lever position.
released. Manually unlock the transmission lock, if
needed, refer to page 127.
Engaging selector lever position N:

with a tap-operated selector lever
NOTICE
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when the ignition is switched off.
There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Do not
Engaging selector lever position P switch ignition off in car washes.
1. Start the engine while pressing on the

brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-
gage selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
Press button P. In this way, the ignition remains
switched on, and a Check Control mes-
Rolling or pushing the vehicle sage is displayed.
The vehicle can roll.
General information Irrespective of the ignition, the selector
In some situations, the vehicle is to roll lever position P is automatically engaged af-
without its own power for a short distance, ter approx. 15 minutes.
for instance in a car wash, or be pushed. If there is a malfunction, you may not be
able to change the selector lever position.
Engaging selector lever position N: Electronically unlock the transmission lock,
with a latching selector lever if needed, refer to page 127.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake. Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-
ing performance. Step on the accelerator
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en- pedal beyond the resistance point at the full
gage selector lever position N. throttle position.
5. Release brake.
The vehicle can roll.
124
Driving CONTROLS
Sport program M/S Activating manual mode

1. Press the selector lever to the left from
Concept selector lever position D, arrow 1.
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier
driving style. The transmission, for instance
shifts up later and the shifting times are
shorter.
Activating the Sport program
2. Press the selector lever forward or pull

it backward, arrows 2.
Manual mode M/S becomes active and the
gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Press the selector lever to the left from se- Shifting
lector lever position D.
– To shift down: press the selector lever
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
forward.
ment cluster, for instance S1.
– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
The sport program of the transmission is ac-
wards.
tivated.
The Steptronic transmission continues
shifting automatically in certain situations,
Ending the Sport program for instance when certain engine speed lim-
Press the selector lever to the right. its are reached.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. With a tap-operated selector lever: when
M2 is set manually while the vehicle is sta-
Manual mode M/S tionary, the transmission will no longer
shift back to M1. This shifting behavior is
Concept retained until you engage M1 manually or
exit M.
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode. Avoiding automatic upshifting
Once a particular engine speed is attained,
M/S manual mode is automatically up-
shifted as needed.
John Cooper Works: once particular engine
speeds are attained, upshifting is not auto-
matically performed in M/S manual mode.
125
CONTROLS Driving
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis- transmission switches back to automatic
sion, automatic shift operations are not per- mode.
formed if one of the following conditions is It is possible to switch into automatic mode
met: as follows:
– DSC is deactivated. – Keep the right shift paddle pulled until
– TRACTION is activated. D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
In addition, there is no downshifting for – In addition to the pulled right shift pad-
kickdown. dle, pull the left shift paddle.
With the appropriate transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected by Continuous manual mode
simultaneously activating kickdown and op- In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
erating the left shift paddles. This is not paddle switches into manual mode perma-
possible by switching briefly via the shift nently.
paddles from selector lever position D to
manual mode M/S. Shifting
Ending the manual mode

Press the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport

transmission
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel al- – Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.
low you to shift gears quickly while keeping – Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.
both hands on the steering wheel. – Downshifting to the lowest possible
gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled.
General information The selected gear is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed by the current
Shifting gear.
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en-
gine and road speeds, for instance down-
shifting is not possible if the engine speed Displays in the instrument cluster
is too high. The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Short-term manual mode
In selector lever position D, actuating a
shift paddle switches into manual mode
temporarily.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the
126
Driving CONTROLS
Releasing the transmission lock 4. Press the button on the front of the se-
manually: with a latching selector lector lever and move the selector lever
lever back slightly.
Release the release lever.
If the selector lever is locked in selector
lever position P despite the ignition being 5. Bring the selector lever into the desired
switched on, the brake pedal being de- position.
pressed and the button on the selector lever For additional information, see the chapter
being pressed, the transmission lock can be on tow-starting and towing.
unlocked manually:
Before unlocking the transmission lock Releasing the transmission lock
manually, set the parking brake to prevent electronically: with a tap-operated
the vehicle from rolling away. selector lever
1. Loosen the selector lever sleeve, to-
gether with the lower retaining ring, General information
from the center console. To do so, pull Electronically unlock the transmission lock
the retaining ring upward at the rear to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
edge. Before unlocking the transmission lock, set
the parking brake to prevent the vehicle
from rolling away.
Engaging selector lever position N

Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin
the engine.
1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
2. Lift the sleeve. Unplug the cable connec- must audibly start.
tor, if needed. 3. Press the button on the selector lever,
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard arrow 1, and press and hold the selector
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 287, press lever into selector lever position N, ar-
the yellow release lever downward, see row N, until selector lever position N is
arrow. displayed in the instrument cluster.
127
CONTROLS Driving
4. Release the selector lever. The instrument cluster displays TRAC-

5. Release brake, as soon as the starter TION in combination with SPORT. The
stops. DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger 2. Engage selector lever position S.
area and secure it against moving on its 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down
own. on the brake.
For additional information, see the chapter 4. Press and hold down the accelerator
on tow-starting and towing. pedal beyond the resistance point at the
full throttle position, kickdown.
Steptronic Sport transmission: A destination flag is displayed in the in-
Launch Control strument cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
Concept briefly until the engine speed is con-
Launch Control enables optimum accelera- stant. Keep accelerator pedal in this po-
tion on surfaces with good traction under sition.
dry surrounding conditions. 6. Release the brake within 3 seconds after
the destination flag illuminates.
General information The vehicle accelerates.
The use of Launch Control causes prema- Upshifting occurs automatically as long
ture component wear since this function as the destination flag is displayed and
represents a very heavy load for the vehicle. the accelerator pedal is not released.
Do not use Launch Control during the
break-in, refer to page 240, period. Repeated use during a trip
Do not turn the steering wheel when driv- After Launch Control has been used, the
ing away with Launch Control. transmission must cool down for approx.
5 minutes before Launch Control can be
Functional requirements used again.
Launch Control is available as soon as the
engine and transmission are at operating After using Launch Control
temperature. To increase driving stability, activate DSC
Depending on the outside temperature and Dynamic Stability Control again.
driving style, the engine and transmission
require an interrupted trip of up to System limits
30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper- An experienced driver may be able to ach-
ating temperature needed for Launch Con- ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF
trol. mode.
Start with launch control
While the engine is running:
1. Press button and select SPORT

with the MINI Driving Modes switch.
128
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview
1 Tachometer 137 4 Fuel gauge 136

2 Indicator/warning lights 5 Display/reset miles 137
3 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 131
129
CONTROLS Displays
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: overview
1 Tachometer 137 4 Vehicle speed

2 Display/reset miles 137 5 Indicator/warning lights
3 Electronic displays 132 6 Fuel gauge 136
130
Displays CONTROLS
Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems Trip computer 142

Messages, for instance Check Control 2 Selector lever position 121
Time 137 Gear shift indicator 139
Outside temperature 137 3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-
Selection lists 141 tus 184
Total miles/trip odometer 137
131
CONTROLS Displays
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: electronic displays
1 Selector lever position 121 5 Messages, for instance Check Control

Gear shift indicator 139 Selection lists 141
2 Time 137 Navigation instructions
MINI Driving Modes switch sta- 6 Total miles/trip odometer 137
tus 184 Trip computer 142
3 Driver assistance systems
4 Outside temperature 137
Range 138
Check Control In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-

put and a text message may appear on the
Control Display.
Concept
The Check Control system monitors func- Indicator/warning lights
tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-
functions in the monitored systems. General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
General information a variety of combinations and colors.
A Check Control message is displayed as a Several of the lights are checked for proper
combination of indicator or warning lights functioning and light up temporarily when
and text messages in the instrument cluster the engine is started or the ignition is
and in the Head-up Display. switched on.
132
Displays CONTROLS
Red lights Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the

imminent danger of a collision when the ve-
Safety belt reminder hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-
tively high differential speed.
Indicator light flashes or is illumi-
nated: safety belt on the driver or Intervene by braking or make an evasive
passenger side is not buckled. The maneuver.
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger Pedestrian Warning
seat.
If a collision with a detected person
Make sure that the safety belts are posi- is imminent, the icon lights up and a
tioned correctly. signal sounds.
Airbag system Instrument cluster without enhanced

Airbag system and belt tensioner features: orange lights
may not be working.
Have the vehicle checked immedi- Active Cruise Control
ately by a dealer's service center or another The number bars shows the selected
qualified service center or repair shop. distance from the vehicle driving
ahead.
Parking brake, electric Camera-based cruise control, refer to
The parking brake is set. page 187.
For releasing the parking brake, re-
fer to page 111. Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle
Brake system has been detected ahead of you.
Braking system impaired. Continue Indicator light flashes: the condi-
to drive moderately. tions are not adequate for the system to
work.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately by a dealer's service center or The system was deactivated but applies the
another qualified service center or brakes until the driver actively resumes
repair shop. control of the vehicle by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Forward Collision Warning

Yellow lights
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when Antilock Braking System ABS
there is the impending danger of a
collision or the distance to the vehicle The Brake Assistant function may
ahead is too small. not activate. Avoid abrupt braking.
Take the longer braking distance
Increase the distance. into account.
133
CONTROLS Displays
Have the system immediately checked by a The indicator light flashes and is then illu-
dealer's service center or another qualified minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres-
service center or repair shop. sure losses cannot be detected.
– Interference caused by systems or devi-
DSC Dynamic Stability Control ces with the same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the interference, the
The indicator light flashes: DSC con- system automatically becomes active
trols the drive and braking forces. again.
The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce
speed and modify your driving style to the – TPM was unable to complete the reset.
driving circumstances. Reset the system again.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal- – A wheel without TPM wheel electronics
functioned. is mounted: have it checked by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
Have the system checked by a dealer's serv- service center or repair shop as needed.
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop. – Malfunction: have the system checked
by a dealer’s service center or another
DSC, refer to page 182. qualified service center or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 162.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
Control is activated Steering system
DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti- Steering system may not be working.

vated. Have the system checked by a deal-
DSC, refer to page 182, and DTC, re- er's service center or another quali-
fer to page 183. fied service center or repair shop.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM Emissions
The FTM signals a loss of tire infla- – The warning light lights up:
tion pressure in a tire. Emissions are deteriorating.
Reduce your speed and stop cau- Have the vehicle checked as soon
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering as possible.
maneuvers. – The warning light flashes under certain
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 167. circumstances:
This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
The indicator light illuminates: the system checked immediately; otherwise,
Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low serious engine misfiring within a brief
tire inflation pressure or a flat tire. period can seriously damage emission
Follow the information in the Check Control control components, in particular the
message. catalytic converter.
134
Displays CONTROLS
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to The indicator light flashes: the set speed
page 286. limit has been exceeded. If this happens, a
signal sounds.
Green lights Reduce speed or deactivate system.
Turn signal Lane departure warning

Turn signal switched on. The indicator light lights up: the sys-
Unusually rapid flashing of the indi- tem is activated. At least one lane
cator light indicates that a turn sig- marking was detected and warnings
nal bulb has failed. can be issued.
Turn signal, refer to page 112. Lane departure warning, refer to page 176.
Parking lights, headlight Blue lights

Parking lights or headlights are
High beams
switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight High beams are switched on.
control, refer to page 152. High beams, refer to page 112.
Front fog lights Hiding Check Control messages

Front fog lights are switched on.
Front fog lights, refer to page 155.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traf-
fic situation.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 154. Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Cruise control Continuous display

The system is switched on. It main- Some Check Control messages are displayed
tains the speed that was set using continuously and are not cleared until the
the control elements on the steering malfunction is eliminated. If several mal-
wheel. functions occur at once, the messages are
displayed consecutively.
Speed Limiter The messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-
The indicator light illuminates: the played again automatically.
system is switched on.
135
CONTROLS Displays
Temporary display 3. Tilt the Controller to the left.

Some Check Control messages are hidden 4. "Check Control"
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The 5. Select the desired text message.
Check Control messages are stored and can
be displayed again later. 6. Select the desired setting.
Displaying stored Check Control Messages after trip completion

messages Certain messages displayed while driving
are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
Fuel gauge
4. "Check Control"
Concept
5. Select the text message.
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-
played.
Display
General information
Check Control
Vehicle tilt position may cause the display
At least one Check Control message to vary.
is displayed or stored. Information on refueling, refer to page 252.
Text messages Instrument cluster without

Text messages in combination with a icon enhanced features: display
in the instrument cluster explain a Check The arrow beside the fuel
Control message and the meaning of the in- pump icon shows which side
dicator/warning lights. of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the
cause of an error or the required action, can Instrument cluster with enhanced
be called up via Check Control. features: display
With urgent messages the added text will
The arrow beside the fuel
be automatically displayed on the Control
pump icon shows which side
Display.
of the vehicle the fuel filler
Depending on the Check Control message, flap is on.
further help can be selected.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
136
Displays CONTROLS
Indicator light in the instrument – When the ignition is switched on, the
cluster trip odometer is reset.
The yellow indicator light illumi-
nates, once the fuel reserve is
reached. Outside temperature
General information
Tachometer If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-
nal sounds.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red A Check Control message is displayed.
warning field. In this range, the fuel supply There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
is reduced to protect the engine.
Safety information
Odometer and trip odometer
Warning
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
Concept there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-
The total mileage driven and the mileage stance on bridges or shady sections of the
driven since the last reset are displayed in road. There is a risk of accident. Modify
the instrument cluster. your driving style to the weather condi-
tions at low temperatures.
Instrument cluster without
additional functions: reset trip
distance Display
Press the button. The outside temperature is
displayed in the instrument
– The odometer is displayed cluster.
when the ignition is
switched off.
– When the ignition is
switched on, the trip od-
ometer is reset. Time
Instrument cluster with enhanced The time is displayed in the
features: reset trip distance instrument cluster.
Press the button. Set the time on the Central In-
formation Display (CID), refer
– The odometer is displayed
to page 48.
when the ignition is
switched off.
137
CONTROLS Displays
Date Displaying the cruising range

The date is displayed in the in- 1. "My MINI"
strument cluster.
Set the date on the Central In-
formation Display (CID), refer 3. "Displays"
to page 48. 4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Range"
Range
Current consumption
General information
When the remaining range is low: Concept
– A Check Control message is displayed Displays the current fuel consumption.
briefly. Check whether you are currently driving in
– The remaining range is shown on the an efficient and environmentally-friendly
trip computer. manner.
– With a sporty driving style, for instance
fast cornering, the engine function is
Displaying the current
not always ensured. consumption
The Check Control message appears contin- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
uously below a range of approx. 1. "My MINI"
30 miles/50 km.
Safety information 3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
NOTICE 5. "Current consumption"
With a driving distance of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are Service notifications
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential
damage. Refuel promptly.
Concept
The function displays the service notifica-
tions and the corresponding maintenance
Display scopes.
The current range is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
General information
After the ignition is switched on the instru-
ment cluster briefly displays available driv-
138
Displays CONTROLS
ing distance or time to the next scheduled Via the Central Information Display (CID):
maintenance.
1. "My MINI"
A service advisor can read out the current
service notifications from your vehicle key. 2. "Vehicle status"
Display 4. "Service required"
5. "Vehicle inspection"
Detailed information on service
notifications 6. "Date:"
More information on the type of service re- 7. Select the desired setting.
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis-
play. Automatic Service Request
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automati-
1. "My MINI"
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service
2. "Vehicle status" center before your vehicle is due for serv-
3. Tilt the Controller to the left. ice.
4. "Service required" You can check when your dealer’s service
center was notified.
Maintenance work and legally mandated
inspections are displayed. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
5. Select an entry to call up detailed infor- 1. "My MINI"
mation. 2. "Vehicle status"
Symbols 3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
4. "Teleservice Call"
Symbols Description
No service is currently re-
quired. Gear shift indicator
The time for recommended Concept
maintenance or a legally The system recommends the most efficient
mandated inspection is ap- gear for the current driving situation.
proaching.
Service interval is exceeded. General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, the gear shift indicator is
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic
Entering appointment dates transmission and with manual transmission.
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle Suggestions to shift up or down are dis-
inspections. played in the instrument cluster.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
139
CONTROLS Displays
Manual transmission: displaying from the rain sensor, and will be displayed
depending on the situation.
Example Description With the navigation system, the system
Efficient gear is set. takes into account the information stored in
the navigation data and also displays speed
limits present on routes without signs.
Depending on the equipment
version, shift to a more effi- Safety information
cient gear.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
Steptronic transmission: displaying sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
Example Description
closely and actively intervene where ap-
Efficient gear is set. propriate.
Depending on the equipment Overview

version, shift to a more effi-
cient gear. Camera
Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info
Concept The camera is installed near the interior
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi- mirror.
mum permitted speed in the instrument Keep the windshield in front of the interior
cluster. mirror clean and clear.
General information
The camera at the base of the interior mir- Display
ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic Limit Info is displayed permanently in the
signs with extra symbols for wet road con- instrument cluster or via the trip computer.
ditions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as
140
Displays CONTROLS
– When the windshield in front of the in-

terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered by a sticker, etc.
– In the event of incorrect detection by
the camera.
– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-
tion system are incorrect.
– In areas not covered by the navigation
system.
Press button on the turn signal lever several
times, if needed. – When roads differ from the navigation,
such as due to changes in road routing.
Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru- – When passing buses or trucks with a
ment cluster. speed sticker.
– If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
Speed Limit Info
– When traffic signs that are valid for a
The last speed limit detected. parallel road are detected.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
With navigation system: Selection lists

Speed Limit Info is not availa-
ble.
General information
buttons on the steering wheel and the dis-
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in
play in the instrument cluster can be used
the Head-up Display.
to display or use the following:
System limits – Current audio source.
The system may not be fully functional and – Phone redial.
may provide incorrect information in the – Turn on voice activation system.
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– When traffic signs are fully or partially
concealed by objects, stickers or paint.
– When driving very close to the vehicle
in front of you.
– When driving toward bright lights or
strong reflections.
141
CONTROLS Displays
Activating a list and adjusting the Trip computer

setting
Concept
Button on the Function
steering wheel The trip computer displays different vehicle
data in the instrument cluster, such as aver-
Move selection up. age values.
Move selection Calling up information

down.
Confirm the selec-
tion.
Instrument cluster without

enhanced features: display
Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the but-
ton on the turn signal lever
Instrument cluster with enhanced calls up the following informa-
features: display tion:
– Range.
– GREEN Info.
When GREEN Mode is activated.
– Average consumption, fuel.
– Average consumption since delivery
from the factory.
– Current consumption, fuel.
– Average speed.
– Date.
– Engine temperature display.
– With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation:
142
Displays CONTROLS
Distance to destination. GREEN info

When destination guidance is activated The achieved range extension may be dis-
in the navigation system. played as a bonus range.
– With equipment version with Head-up
Display and navigation: Average consumption
Arrival time. The average consumption is calculated for
When destination guidance is activated the period while the engine is running.
in the navigation system. The average consumption is calculated for
– Instrument cluster without enhanced the distance traveled since the last reset by
features: the trip computer.
Speed Limit Info. Average speed
– Vehicle speed. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with
– Trip odometer. the engine manually stopped are not in-
The unit of some information can be cluded in the calculation of the average
changed. speed.
Setting units, refer to page 49.
Resetting average values
Selecting information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can select what information from the trip
computer can be accessed in the instrument
cluster.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays" Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
Engine temperature display
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used. Concept
The current engine temperature, based on a
Information in detail combination of coolant and engine oil tem-
perature is displayed. As soon as the opti-
Range mum operating temperature has been at-
Displays the estimated cruising range avail- tained, the indicator is in the center
able with the remaining fuel. position.
The range is calculated based on your driv-
ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
143
CONTROLS Displays
General information The distance to the destination is adopted

If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en- automatically.
gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed too. Time of arrival
When the engine temperature is too Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
high, a red indicator light is dis- estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
played. destination is entered in the navigation sys-
tem before the trip is started.
When the engine oil temperature is The time must be correctly set.
too high, a red indicator light is dis-
played. Instrument cluster without additional
functions: Speed Limit Info
To check the coolant level, refer to
page 283. Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
mum permitted speed in the instrument
Instrument cluster without enhanced cluster.
features: display
Trip computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The trip computer displays different vehicle
data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
General information
Two types of trip computers are available
Instrument cluster with enhanced on the Control Display:
features: display – "Onboard info": average values, such as
the consumption, are displayed. The val-
ues can be reset individually.
– "Trip computer": the values deliver an
overview of a specific route and can be
reset as often as necessary.
Calling up the trip computer or

onboard computer
Distance to destination 1. "My MINI"
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the 2. "Driving information"
distance remaining to the destination is dis- 3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
played if a destination is entered in the nav-
igation system before the trip is started.
144
Displays CONTROLS
Resetting the trip computer 1. "My MINI"

Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "Technology in action"
1. "My MINI" 3. "Sport displays"
2. "Driving information" 4. "Sports instruments"
3. "Onboard info" Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
4. "Consumption" or "Speed" 1. Activate SPORT.
5. "OK" 2. "Sport displays"
3. "Sports instruments"
Resetting the trip computer
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Vehicle state
1. "My MINI"
2. "Driving information" General information
The following vehicle and surrounding area
3. "Trip computer"
data is automatically checked and evaluated
4. Move the Controller to the left, if in succession:
needed. – Range.
– "Reset": all values are reset. – Engine temperature.
– "Automatic reset": all values are – Outside temperature.
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-
cle has come to a standstill. – SPORT program state.
5. If necessary, "OK" Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle
state is displayed.
Checking vehicle state

Driving Excitement
Concept 1. "My MINI"
On the Control Display, sport instruments 2. "Technology in action"
can be displayed, and the vehicle state can 3. "Sport displays"
be checked before the use of the SPORT
program. 4. "Vehicle and surroundings"
Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:
Sport instruments 1. Activate SPORT.
General information 2. "Sport displays"
On the Control Display, values for power 3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
and torque are displayed.
Displaying sport instruments

145
CONTROLS Displays
Speed warning LED ring on the central in-

strument cluster
Concept
The system can be used to set a speed limit. Concept
A warning will be issued when this speed The LED ring displays light animations to
limit is exceeded. represent specific functions.
General information Basic displays
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed Basic functions, for instance the tachome-
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it ter, can be set to be displayed continually if
has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. so desired.
Adjusting Event displays

Via the Central Information Display (CID): Functions that are only displayed tempora-
1. "My MINI" rily, for instance the volume or temperature
settings, can be set as event displays.
Several vehicle assistance functions can
3. "Speed warning" also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-
4. "Warning at:" play corresponds with the displays of the
function in the respective display.
speed is displayed.
Example: tachometer
Like the tachometer in the instrument clus-
ter, the light animations of the tachometer's
Activating/deactivating basic display show the current RPMs and
Via the Central Information Display (CID): the respective RPM warning thresholds.
1. "My MINI"
Display
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Speed warning"
Setting your current speed as the

speed warning
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" – Arrow 1: current RPM.
3. "Speed warning" – Arrow 2: prewarning field.
4. "Select current speed" – Arrow 3: warning field.
146
Displays CONTROLS
Switching on/off LED ring Head-up Display

1. "My MINI" Concept
2. "System settings" This system projects important information
into the driver's field of vision, for instance
3. "Displays" the speed.
4. "Center Instrument" The driver can get information without
5. "Center Instrument" averting his or her eyes from the road.
Adjusting the LED ring General information

Via the Central Information Display (CID): Follow the instructions for cleaning the
Head-up Display. For additional informa-
1. "My MINI" tion, see the chapter on care.
3. "Displays" Safety information
4. "Center Instrument"
Warning
5. "Basic display" or "Event display"
When extending and retracting the projec-
6. Select the desired setting. tion screen of the Head-up Display, body
parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
Setting the brightness jury. Make sure that the area of movement
The brightness can be adjusted when night of the projection screen is clear during
lighting is active in the instrument cluster. opening and closing.
1. "My MINI" NOTICE
2. "System settings" The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
3. "Displays" components that can easily be scraped or
damaged. There is a risk of damage to
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night" Do not place any objects on the Head-up
6. Turn the Controller until the desired Display, attach to system components or
brightness is set. plug into the system. Do not move the
moving parts manually.
currently used.
147
CONTROLS Displays
Overview Selecting displays in the Head-up

Display
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-
Switching the Head-up Display up Display.
on/off Settings are stored for the driver profile
When switching on, the projection lens of currently used.
the Head-up Display is extended. When
switching off, the projection lens of the Setting the brightness
Head-up Display is retracted again. The brightness is automatically adjusted to
Via the Central Information Display (CID): the ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
1. "My MINI"
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
3. "Displays"
Display 5. "Brightness"
Overview brightness is set.
The following information is displayed on 7. Press the Controller.
the Head-up Display:
When the low beams are switched on, the
– Vehicle speed. brightness of the Head-up Display can be
– Navigation instructions. additionally influenced using the instru-
– Check Control messages. ment lighting, refer to page 156.
– Selection list from the instrument clus- The setting is stored for the driver profile
ter. currently used.
– Driver assistance systems.
Adjusting the height
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
148
Displays CONTROLS
3. "Displays" John Cooper Works: sport dis-

4. "Head-Up Display" plays in the Head-up Display
5. "Height"
6. Turn the Controller until the desired General information
height is reached. The sport displays in the Head-up Display
7. Press the Controller. assist with a sporty driving style.
currently used. Switching on
The height of the Head-up Display can also Via the Central Information Display (CID):
be stored using the memory function, refer 1. "My MINI"
to page 94.
Setting the rotation 3. "Displays"
The screen of the Head-up Display can be 4. "Head-Up Display"
rotated around its own axis.
5. "Displayed information"
6. "Sport displays"
1. "My MINI" With navigation system: if the sport dis-
2. "System settings" plays are switched on, no navigation con-
3. "Displays" tent will be displayed on the Head-up Dis-
play.
5. "Rotation" Display
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is selected.
currently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following fac-
tors: 1 Vehicle speed
– Certain seat positions. 2 Shift point indicator
– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis- 3 Gear display
play. 4 Current engine speed
– Sunglasses with certain polarization fil- 5 Warning field, speed
ters.
– Wet roads.
– Unfavorable light conditions.
149
CONTROLS Displays
Shift point indicator – Country Timer Info: display of the best

time and total time since the last reset.
Concept Follow the notes on traveling on poor roads,
The shift point indicator in the Head-up refer to page 244.
Display indicates the optimum shifting
point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the Go to the menu
best possible vehicle acceleration is ach- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
ieved.
1. "My MINI"
Functional requirements 2. "MINI Country Timer"
– Steptronic Sport transmission: 3. Select the desired setting.
Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy- – : display of the Country Timer.
namic Traction Control DTC are acti- – : display of the Country Timer
vated. Info.
– Press the accelerator pedal all the way
down. Display of the Country Timer
Display Overview
Successive gray illuminated fields indicate
the upcoming shift moment.
Shift up immediately when the red fields
light up.
When the maximum speed is reached, the
entire display flashes red and the fuel sup-
ply is interrupted in order to protect the en-
gine.
– Symbols for road gradient and uneven-

Country timer ness, arrow 1.
– Category, arrow 2.
Concept – Pulse value, arrow 3.
The system provides information on how
long and to what degree the vehicle was Symbols, pulse deflection and pulse
driven on inclined, uneven, unpaved or value
snow-covered roads, for example.
When the vehicle is being driven on in-
clined or uneven roads, the corresponding
General information icon lights up, arrow 1. One or more pulse
The system consists of the following two deflections are displayed and the pulse
menus: value increases, arrow 3.
– Country Timer: display of the gradient
and unevenness of the routes traveled.
150
Displays CONTROLS
Categories Information at a glance

As the pulse value increases, the vehicle be-
comes larger and reaches various levels, ar- Symbols Description
row 2. "Flat Tire Monitor": status of
the run-flat tires, refer to
Display of the Country Timer Info page 167.
Best time "Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-

tus of the Tire Pressure
The shortest travel time necessary to reach Monitor TPM, refer to
the highest level. page 162.
Total time "Engine oil level": electronic
engine oil level check, refer
The total travel time that the vehicle was
to page 279.
driven at the highest level.
"Check Control": Check Con-
Resetting the Country Timer Info trol messages are stored in
Via the Central Information Display (CID): the background and can be
displayed on the Control
1. "My MINI" Display. Displaying stored
2. "MINI Country Timer" Check Control messages, re-
fer to page 136.
3. "MINI Country Timer Info"
"Service required": display-
4. Select the desired setting:
ing service notifications, re-
– "Reset record time and display": refer to page 138.
setting the best time.
"Teleservice Call": Tele-
– "Reset total time": resetting the total
service Call.
time.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems.
Going to the vehicle status

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
151
CONTROLS Lights
Lights
Vehicle features and options Icon Function
Parking lights.
the series. It also describes features and Low beams.
tions or country versions. This also applies Instrument lighting.
observed.
Parking lights, low beams and
roadside parking lights
Overview
General information
Switches in the vehicle
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the igni-
tion is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended
The light switch element is located next to periods; otherwise, the battery may become
the steering wheel. discharged and it would then be impossible
to start the engine.
Icon Function Canada: when parking, switch on the one-
Front fog lights. sided roadside parking light, refer to
page 153.
Automatic headlight control. Low beams

Cornering light. Position of switch:
The low beams light up when the ignition is
Lights off. switched on.
Daytime running lights.
152
Lights CONTROLS
Canada: roadside parking light 3. "Lighting"

Concept
5. "Welcome lights"
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
currently used.
Switching on
Pathway lighting
General information
The low beams stay illuminated for a partic-
ular time if the high beams are switched on
after radio-ready state is switched off.
Canada: the low beams stay illuminated for
a particular time if the headlight flasher is
switched on after radio-ready state is
With radio-ready state switched off, press switched off.
the lever either up or down past the resist-
ance point for approx. 2 seconds. Setting the duration
Switching off
1. "My MINI"
Briefly press the lever to the resistance
point in the opposite direction. 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
Welcome lights and pathway
5. "Pathway lighting"
lighting
6. Set length of time.
Welcome lights currently used.
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment and Automatic headlight control
the ambient brightness, individual light
functions may be switched on briefly when
the vehicle is unlocked. Concept
The low beams are switched on and off au-
Activating/deactivating tomatically depending on the ambient
Position of switch: , brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-
light or if there is precipitation.
1. "My MINI" General information
2. "Vehicle settings" A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon
can cause the lights to be switched on.
153
CONTROLS Lights
Activating Cornering light

Position of switch:
The indicator light in the instrument cluster General information
is illuminated when the low beams are Position of switch:
switched on.
In tight curves, for instance on mountain-
ous roads or when turning, an additional,
System limits cornering light is switched on that lights up
The automatic headlight control cannot the inside of the curve when the vehicle is
serve as a substitute for your personal judg- moving below a certain speed.
ment of lighting conditions. The cornering light is automatically
For example, the sensors are unable to de- switched on depending on the steering an-
tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa- gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-
tions, switch the lights on manually. nals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering
lights may be automatically switched on re-
Daytime running lights gardless of the steering angle.
General information
Switch position: Adaptive headlight range con-
– , trol
– Depending on the national-market ver-
sion: The adaptive headlight range control fea-
ture balances out acceleration and braking
The daytime running lights light up when
processes as well as the vehicle load condi-
the ignition is switched on.
tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming
Depending on the national-market version: traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.
after switching off the ignition, the parking
lights will illuminate in position .
High-beam Assistant
In some countries, daytime running lights
are mandatory, so it may not be possible to
Concept
deactivate the daytime running lights. The high-beam Assistant detects other traf-
fic participants early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depend-
1. "My MINI" ing on the traffic situation.
General information
3. "Lighting"
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the
4. "Exterior lighting" high beams are switched on, whenever the
5. Select the desired setting. traffic situation allows. In the low speed
Settings are stored for the currently used range, the high beams are not switched on
vehicle key. by the system.
154
Lights CONTROLS
The system responds to light from oncom- The system is not fully functional in the fol-
ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, lowing situations, and driver intervention
and to ambient lighting, for instance in may be necessary:
towns and cities. – In very unfavorable weather conditions,
The high beams can be switched on and off such as fog or heavy precipitation.
manually at any time. – When detecting poorly-lit road users
such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback
Activating/deactivating riders and wagons; when driving close
to train or ship traffic; or at animal
crossings.
– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-
sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-
scured oncoming traffic on highways.
– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
– When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle ered with stickers, etc.
equipment: ,
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Fog lights
cluster is illuminated when the low Front fog lights
beams are switched on.
The headlights are automatically switched Concept
between low beams and high beams. The front fog lights work alongside the low
The blue indicator light in the instru- beams to illuminate a wider area of the
ment cluster lights up when the sys- roadway.
tem switches on the high beams.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated – Low beams are switched on.
when manually switching the high beams
on and off, refer to page 112. Switching on/off
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant,
press the button on the turn signal lever. Press the button.
The green indicator light lights up if
System limits the front fog lights are switched on.
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a If the automatic headlight control, refer to
substitute for the driver's personal judg- page 153, is activated, the low beams will
ment of when to use the high beams. In sit- come on automatically when you switch on
uation that require this, therefore switch off the front fog lights.
manually.
155
CONTROLS Lights
When the high beams or headlight flasher Overview

are activated, the front fog lights are not
switched on.
Instrument lighting
The parking lights or low beams must be
switched on to set the brightness.
1 Interior lights
Adjusting 2 Reading lights
Adjust the brightness with the 3 Ambient light
thumbwheel.
Switching the interior lights on/off
Press the button.
To switch off permanently: press the button

Interior lights and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
General information Switching the reading lights on and

Depending on the equipment, the interior off manually
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour- Press the button.
tesy lights are controlled automatically.
The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting The reading lights are located in the front
controls brightness of some of these fea- next to the interior light.
tures.
Ambient light
General information
Depending on the equipment version, light-
ing can be adjusted for some lights in the
car's interior.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Lighting"
156
Lights CONTROLS
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Changing color
Push the switch forward or back:
manual color change.
Press the switch forward or back-

ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds
until the Ambient Light flashes sev-
eral times: automatic color change. Push the
switch again to end color changes.
Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the bright-
ness of the ambient light can be adjusted
via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
157
CONTROLS Safety
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and In the event of a side impact, the side air-
the front passenger by responding to frontal bag protects the side of the body in the
impacts in which safety belts alone would chest and lap area.
not provide adequate protection.
158
Safety CONTROLS
Head airbag shoulder rests against the backrest

In the event of a side impact, the head air- when crossing the hands and the upper
bag protects the head. body is as far back as possible while still
maintaining a comfortable grip on the
steering wheel.
Ejection Mitigation
– Make sure that the front passenger is
The head airbag system is designed as an
sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her
ejection mitigation countermeasure to re- feet and legs in the floor area and does
duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle not support them on the dashboard.
occupants through side windows during
rollovers or side impact events. – Make sure that occupants keep their
heads away from the side airbag.
Knee airbag – There should be no additional persons,
animals or objects between an airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the
and a person.
event of a frontal impact.
– Dashboard and windshield on the front
Protective effect passenger side must stay clear - do not
attach adhesive labels or coverings and
Airbags are not triggered in every impact do not attach brackets or cables, for in-
situation, for instance in less severe acci- stance for GPS devices or mobile
dents or rear-end collisions. phones.
Information on optimum effect of the – Do not apply adhesive materials to the
airbag cover panels, do not cover them
airbags or modify them in any way.
– Do not use the cover of the front airbag
Warning on the front passenger side as a storage
If the seat position is incorrect or the de- area.
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, – Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions
the airbag system cannot provide protec- or other objects to the front passenger
tion as intended and may cause additional seat that are not specifically suited for
injuries due to triggering. There is a risk seats with integrated side airbags.
of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-
– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
formation on achieving the optimum pro-
jackets, over the backrests.
tective effect of the airbag system.
– Never modify either the individual com-
– Keep a distance from the airbags. ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-
tem. This also applies to steering wheel
– Always grasp the steering wheel on the covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to – Do not remove the airbag system.
keep the risk of injury to your hands or Even when you follow all instructions very
arms as low as possible when the airbag closely, injury from contact with the airbags
is triggered. cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-
– Adjust seat and steering wheel so that tions.
hands can be crossed over the steering
wheel. Select the settings so that the
159
CONTROLS Safety
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to Airbag system malfunctioning
short-term and, in most cases, temporary – Warning light does not come on when
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants. the ignition is switched on.
Vehicle modifications for a person with dis- – The warning light lights up continu-
abilities may affect the air bag system; con- ously.
tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-
formation.
Automatic deactivation of the
Warnings and information on the airbags front-seat passenger airbags
are also found on the sun visors.
Concept
Functional readiness of the airbag
The system reads if the front passenger seat
system is occupied by measuring the human body's
resistance.
Safety information
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger's side are activated or deacti-
Warning vated.
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a General information
risk of injury. Do not touch individual Before transporting a child on the front pas-
components. senger seat, refer to the safety information
and instructions for children on the front
passenger seat, see Children.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to fail- Safety information
ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-
ing of the airbag system. In the case of a Warning
malfunction, the airbag system might not
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
trigger as intended despite the accident
function, the system must be able to de-
severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
tect whether a person is sitting in the
ger to life. Have the airbag system
front passenger seat. The entire seat cush-
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-
ion area must be used for this purpose.
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
qualified service center or repair shop.
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, Malfunction of the automatic
the warning light in the instrument deactivation system
cluster lights up briefly and thereby When transporting older children and
indicates the operational readiness of the adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may
entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. be deactivated in certain seat positions. In
this case, the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up.
160
Safety CONTROLS
In this case, change the seat position so – The indicator light does not light up
that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac- when, for instance a correctly seated
tivated and the indicator light goes out. person of sufficient size is detected on
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, the seat. The airbags on the front pas-
have the person sit in the rear. senger side are activated.
To enable correct recognition of the occu-
pied seat cushion.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children
– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
seated in a child restraint system, particu-
or other items to the front passenger
larly in child restraint systems required by
seat unless they are specifically deter-
NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-
mined to be safe for use on the front
cle was manufactured. After installing a
passenger seat.
child restraint system, make sure that the
– Do not place any electronic devices on indicator light for the front-seat passenger
the front passenger seat if a child re- airbags lights up. This indicates that the
straint system is to be installed on it. child restraint system has been detected
– Do not place objects under the seat that and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
could press against the seat from below. activated.
– No moisture in or on the seat.
Strength of the driver's and front-
Indicator light for the front-seat seat passenger airbag
passenger airbags The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de-
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function
over the long-term, calibrate the front seats
as soon as a relevant Check Control mes-
sage is displayed. A message also appears
on the Control Display.
The indicator light for the front-seat passen-

Calibrating the front seats
ger airbags indicates the operating state of
the front-seat passenger airbags. Warning
The light indicates whether the airbags are There is a risk of jamming when moving
either activated or deactivated. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
– The indicator light lights area of movement of the seat is clear prior
up when a child is properly to any adjustment.
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is An appropriate Check Control message is
empty. The airbags on the displayed.
front passenger side are
not activated.
161
CONTROLS Safety
1. Move the respective seat all the way for- – After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
ward. justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed.
2. Move the respective seat forward again.
The seat moves forward briefly. – Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-
tion.
Status display
The calibration procedure is completed Current status
when the Check Control message disap-
pears. The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-
If the message continues to be displayed, tem is active.
repeat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re-
peat calibration, have the system checked 1. "My MINI"
as soon as possible. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure General information
in the four mounted tires. The system warns
Tire and system status are indicated by the
you if there is a significant loss of pressure
color of the wheels and a text message on
in one or more tires.
the Control Display.
General information All wheels green
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire System is active and will issue a warning re-
inflation pressure and, depending on the lated to the tire inflation pressures stored
model, the tire temperature. during the last reset.
Further information and instructions on us-
ing the system can also be found under Tire One to four yellow wheels
inflation pressure, refer to page 256.
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
The following conditions must be met for Gray wheels
the system; otherwise, reliable message of a It may not be possible to identify tire infla-
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: tion pressure losses.
– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re- Possible causes:
set was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure. – Malfunction.
– The system is being reset.
162
Safety CONTROLS
Additional information Safety information

The status control display additionally
shows the current tire inflation pressures. Warning
The values shown are instantaneous meas-
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
urements and may vary depending on driv-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
ing style or weather conditions.
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
Resetting the system stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not
Via the Central Information Display (CID): continue driving if the vehicle is equipped
with normal tires. Follow the information
1. "My MINI"
on run-flat tires and continued driving
2. "Vehicle status" with these tires.
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off. If a tire inflation pressure check is
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform required
reset".
6. Drive away. Message
The wheels are displayed in gray and the A icon with a Check Control message ap-
following is displayed "Resetting Tire pears on the Control Display.
Pressure Monitor…". Icon Possible cause
After a travel time of several minutes, the The system has detected a wheel
set tire inflation pressures are accepted as change, but no reset was done.
reference values. The resetting process is
completed automatically while driving. No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a warn-
After successful completion of the reset, the ing based on the tire inflation
tires appear in green on the Control Display pressures stored during the last
and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label reset.
for recommended pressures." is displayed.
Inflation was not carried out ac-
You may interrupt this trip at any time. cording to specifications.
When you continue the reset resumes auto-
matically. The tire inflation pressure has
fallen below the level of the last
Messages reset.
General information Measure

A low tire inflation pressure may cause the 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be needed.
switched on. 2. Reset the system.
163
CONTROLS Safety
If the tire inflation pressure is too low Icon Possible cause
Message There is a flat tire or a major loss

in tire inflation pressure.
A yellow warning light is illuminated
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a warn-
ing based on the tire inflation
In addition, a icon with a Check Control
pressures stored during the last
message appears on the Control Display.
reset.
Icon Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure Measure
loss. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
No reset was performed for the Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
system. The system issues a warn- neuvers.
ing based on the tire inflation 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
pressures stored during the last normal tires or run-flat tires.
reset. Run-flat tires, refer to page 265, are la-
beled with a circular icon containing the
Measure letters RSC marked on the tire's side-
1. Reduce your speed and drive moder- wall.
ately. Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h. Actions in the event of a flat tire
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire infla- Normal tires
tion pressure in all four tires, if neces- 1. Identify the damaged tire.
sary. To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
3. Reset the system. sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If there is a significant loss of tire If the tire inflation pressure in all four
inflation pressure tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
Message case, perform the reset.
A yellow warning light is illuminated If the tire inflation pressure in all four
in the instrument cluster. tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
In addition, a icon with the affected tire ap- case, initialize the system.
pears in a Check Control message on the If identification of flat tire damage is
Control Display. not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
164
Safety CONTROLS
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire ing distance may be less but may also be
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. more if an economical driving style is used.
In this case, have the electronics checked If the vehicle is loaded with an average
and replaced at the next opportunity. weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to
Run-flat tires drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Safety information Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
Warning handle differently, potentially leading to
The vehicle handles differently when a conditions such as the following:
run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire – Greater likelihood of swerving off
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- course.
ity when braking, braking distances are – Longer braking distances.
longer and the self-steering properties will
– Changed self-steering properties.
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
50 mph/80 km/h. steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Maximum speed Final tire failure

You may continue driving with a damaged Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
Continued driving with a flat tire the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: dent.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
neuvers. service center or another qualified service
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h. System limits
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity. Temperature
If the tire inflation pressure in all four The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tire's temperature.
tor may not have been reset. In this
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase
case, perform the reset.
the tire's temperature, thus increasing the
tire inflation pressure.
Possible driving distance with a
depressurized tire The tire inflation pressure is reduced when
the tire temperature falls again.
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the These circumstances may cause a warning
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road when temperatures fall very sharply.
conditions, outside temperature. The driv-
165
CONTROLS Safety
Sudden tire pressure loss bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
The system cannot indicate sudden serious size than the size indicated on the vehicle
tire damage caused by external circumstan- placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
ces. should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
Failure performing a reset feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system
The system does not function properly if a (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
reset has not been carried out, for instance telltale when one or more of your tires is
a flat tire is reported though tire inflation significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
pressures are correct. when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires
Malfunction as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
The yellow warning light flashes and proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
is then illuminated continuously. A under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
Check Control message is displayed. heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-
It may not be possible to identify tire pres- tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
sure losses. tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that
Examples and recommendations in the fol-
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
lowing situations:
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
for instance an emergency wheel, is if under-inflation has not reached the level
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
service center or another qualified serv- pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
ice center or repair shop as needed. equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-
– Malfunction: have system checked by a tor to indicate when the system is not oper-
dealer’s service center or another quali- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
fied service center or repair shop. cator is combined with the low tire pressure
– The system was unable to complete the telltale. When the system detects a mal-
reset. Perform a system reset again. function, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain contin-
– Interference caused by systems or devi- uously illuminated. This sequence will
ces with the same radio frequency: after continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
leaving the area of the interference, the as long as the malfunction exists. When the
system automatically becomes active malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
again. system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
Declaration according to NHTSA/ functions may occur for a variety of rea-
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring sons, including the installation of replace-
System ment or alternate tires or wheels on the
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
should be checked monthly when cold and tioning properly. Always check the TPMS
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- malfunction telltale after replacing one or
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- sure that the replacement or alternate tires
166
Safety CONTROLS
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to Initialization required

function properly.
An initialization must be performed in the
Flat Tire Monitor FTM – After the tire inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
– After a tire or wheel replacement.
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure Performing initialization
loss on the basis of rotation speed differen-
When initializing, the set tire inflation
ces between the individual wheels while
pressures serve as reference values in order
driving.
to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, by confirming the tire inflation pressures.
the diameter and therefore the rotational
Do not initialize the system when driving
speed of the corresponding wheel changes.
with tire chains.
The difference will be detected and reported
as a flat tire. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
The system does not measure the actual in- 1. "My MINI"
flation pressure in the tires. 2. "Vehicle status"
Functional requirements 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The following conditions must be met for 4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
the system; otherwise, reliable message of a 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: reset".
– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini- 6. Drive away.
tialization was performed with the cor- The initialization is completed while driv-
rect tire inflation pressure. ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
– After the tire pressure was adjusted to a The initialization automatically continues
new value, an initialization was per- when driving continues.
formed.
Messages
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor General information
can be displayed, for instance whether the
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic
RPA is active.
Stability Control is switched on, if needed.
1. "My MINI" Safety information
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
The status is displayed.
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
167
CONTROLS Safety
stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not may not have been initialized. In this
continue driving if the vehicle is equipped case, initialize the system.
with normal tires. Follow the information If identification of flat tire damage is
on run-flat tires and continued driving not possible, please contact a dealer’s
with these tires. service center or another qualified serv-
Indication of a flat tire 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
A yellow warning light is illuminated
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case, have the electronics checked
In addition, a icon with a Check Control
and replaced at the next opportunity.
message appears on the Control Display.
Icon Possible cause Run-flat tires
There is a flat tire or a major loss
in tire inflation pressure. Safety information
Warning
Measure
The vehicle handles differently when a
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-
neuvers. ity when braking, braking distances are
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with longer and the self-steering properties will
normal tires or run-flat tires. change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
Run-flat tires, refer to page 265, are la- moderately and do not exceed a speed of
beled with a circular icon containing the 50 mph/80 km/h.
letters RSC marked on the tire's side-
wall. Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged
Actions in the event of a flat tire tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Normal tires Continued driving with a flat tire
1. Identify the damaged tire. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires, for instance using 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. neuvers.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four 2. Do not exceed a speed of
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- 50 mph/80 km/h.
tor may not have been reset. In this 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
case, perform the reset. four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
168
Safety CONTROLS
may not have been initialized. In this nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation
case, initialize the system. pressure regularly.
– Sudden serious tire damage caused by
Possible driving distance with a external circumstances cannot be recog-
depressurized tire nized in advance.
The distance for which it may be possible to – When the system has not been initial-
drive safely varies depending on how the ized.
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
– When driving on a snowy or slippery
conditions, outside temperature. The driv-
road surface.
ing distance may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used. – Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
ing).
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to – When driving with tire chains.
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Intelligent Safety

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to Concept
conditions such as the following:
Intelligent Safety enables central operation
– Greater likelihood of swerving off of the driver assistance systems.
course.
The intelligent safety systems can help pre-
– Longer braking distances. vent an imminent collision.
– Changed self-steering properties. – Forward Collision Warning with city
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt collision mitigation, refer to page 170.
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- – Pedestrian Collision Warning with City
cles, for instance curbs or potholes. Collision Mitigation, refer to page 174.
– Lane departure warning, refer to
Final tire failure
page 176.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire. Safety information
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent. Warning
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s The system cannot serve as a substitute
service center or another qualified service for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
center or repair shop. sessing visibility and traffic situation.
System limits style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
The system could be delayed or malfunction propriate.
in the following situations:
– A natural, even tire inflation pressure
loss in all four tires will not be recog-
169
CONTROLS Safety
Press button briefly:

Warning – The menu for the Intelligent
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a Safety system is displayed. The
substitute for the driver’s personal judg- systems are individually
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not switched off according to their
issue warnings or reactions, or these may respective settings.
be issued late or in a manner that is not – LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
consistent with their normal use. There is tive to their individual settings.
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
and actively intervene where appropriate.
currently in use.
Press button again:

Warning – All Intelligent Safety systems
Due to system limits, individual functions are switched on.
can malfunction during tow-starting/ – The LED lights up green.
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident. Hold down button:
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
– All Intelligent Safety systems
prior to tow-starting/towing.
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Overview
Button in the vehicle Forward Collision Warning
with city light braking func-
tion
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In
the event of an accident, the system may re-
duce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an im-
Intelligent Safety button minent collision and activates brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
The Brake Intervention function activates
Switching on/off and applies the brakes with limited force
Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto- and duration.
matically active after every departure. Some A camera at the base of the interior mirror
Intelligent Safety systems activate accord- controls the system.
ing to the last setting. The Forward Collision Warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
170
Safety CONTROLS
With the vehicle approaching another vehi-

cle intentionally, the Forward Collision Warning
Warning and brake intervention are delayed Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
in order to avoid false system reactions. substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
General information issue warnings or reactions, or these may
The system warns at two levels of an immi- be issued late or in a manner that is not
nent danger of collision at speeds from ap- consistent with their normal use. There is
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn- a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
ings may vary with the current driving traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
situation. and actively intervene where appropriate.
If necessary, a brake intervention will oc-
cur. Depending on the equipment and na-
tional-market version, the brake interven- Warning
tion will occur up to approx. Due to system limits, individual functions
35 mph/60 km/h or up to approx. can malfunction during tow-starting/
35 mph/60 km/h. towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Detection range Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Objects that the system can detect are

taken into account.
Safety information
Warning Intelligent Safety button

sessing visibility and traffic situation.
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
propriate.
171
CONTROLS Safety
Camera – The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the Central
Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror. 5. Select the desired setting.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior The selected warning time is stored for the
mirror clean and clear. driver profile currently in use.
Switching on/off Warning with braking function

Display
Switching on automatically
A warning symbol appears in the instru-
The system is automatically active when the
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a
vehicle is turned on.
collision with a detected vehicle is immi-
nent.
Icon Measure
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent Icon lights up red: prewarning.
Safety system is displayed. The Brake and increase distance.
systems are individually
switched off according to their Symbol flashes red and an acous-
respective settings. tic signal sounds: acute warning.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec- Brake and make an evasive ma-
tive to their individual settings. neuver, if necessary.
ual settings are stored for the driver profile Prewarning
currently in use. This warning is provided, for instance when
there is impending danger of a collision or
Press button again: the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
– All Intelligent Safety systems small.
are switched on. If a prewarning is provided, respond by
– The LED lights up green. braking as warranted.
Hold down button: Acute warning with braking function

– All Intelligent Safety systems An acute warning is displayed when there
are switched off. is an imminent danger of collision due to
172
Safety CONTROLS
the vehicle approaching another object at a accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
high speed. tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
The driver must intervene actively when information in this Owner’s Manual re-
there is an acute warning. If necessary, the garding the scope of the system’s opera-
driver is assisted by a minor automatic tion and limitations.
brake intervention in a possible risk of colli-
sion.
Detection range
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning. The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
Brake intervention might come late.
The warning prompts the driver to inter- The following situations may not be de-
vene. While a warning is active, the maxi- tected, for example:
mum braking force is used when the brake – Slow moving vehicles when you ap-
is applied. In order to activate the Brake As- proach them at high speed.
sistant function, you must apply the brakes – Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front
quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
collision, the system may assist with brak-
ing. When the vehicle is traveling at a low – Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-
speed, the vehicle may come to a complete ance.
stop. – Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Manual transmission: during a brake inter-
vention up to a complete stop, the engine Functional limitations
may be shut down. The system may be limited in the following
The driver may interrupt the braking inter- situations:
vention function by stepping on the acceler- – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- fall.
ing wheel. – In tight curves.
The system’s ability to detect objects may – If the field of view of the camera or the
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to windshield is dirty or covered.
the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
– If the driving stability control systems
garding the limitations of the system and
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
actively intervene as warranted.
– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
System limits engine via the Start/Stop button.
Safety information diately after vehicle delivery.
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
Warning
from the sun low in the sky.
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to Warning sensitivity
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of The more sensitive the warning settings
are, the more warnings are displayed.
173
CONTROLS Safety
Therefore, there may also be an excess of – Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
premature or unjustified warnings and reac- left of the central area.
tions. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
cated within the central area. A warning is
issued about pedestrians who are located
Pedestrian Collision Warning within the extended area only if they are
with City Collision Mitigation moving in the direction of the central area.
Concept Safety information

The system may prevent some accidents
with pedestrians. Warning
When driving at city speeds, the system The system cannot serve as a substitute
will issue a warning if there is imminent for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup- sessing visibility and traffic situation.
port this with a light braking function. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
The camera at the base of the interior mir- style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
ror controls the system. closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
General information
In sufficiently bright conditions, the system
issues a warning of a possible risk of colli- Warning
sion with pedestrians in the speed range Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
35 mph/60 km/h ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
The system reacts to people who are within issue warnings or reactions, or these may
the detection range of the system. be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is
Detection range a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
The detection area in front of the vehicle is prior to tow-starting/towing.
divided into two areas:
– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of
the vehicle.
174
Safety CONTROLS
Overview switched off according to their

respective settings.
Button in the vehicle – LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
currently in use.
Press button again:

are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Intelligent Safety button
Hold down button:
Camera are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function

Display
If a collision with a detected person is im-
minent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis-
play.
The camera is installed near the interior The red icon is displayed and a sig-
mirror. nal sounds.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior Intervene immediately by braking or
mirror clean and clear. make an evasive maneuver.
Switching on/off Brake intervention

The warning prompts the driver to inter-
Switching on automatically vene. While a warning is active, the maxi-
The system is automatically active when the mum braking force is used when the brake
vehicle is turned on. is applied. In order to activate the Brake As-
sistant function, you must apply the brakes
Switching on/off manually quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of
Press button briefly: collision, the system may assist with brak-
ing. When the vehicle is traveling at a low
– The menu for the Intelligent speed, the vehicle may come to a complete
Safety system is displayed. The stop.
175
CONTROLS Safety
Manual transmission: during a brake inter- – Pedestrians having a body size less than
vention up to a complete stop, the engine 32 in/80 cm.
may be shut down.
The driver may interrupt the braking inter- Functional limitations
vention function by stepping on the acceler- The system may be limited or may not be
ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- available in the following situations:
ing wheel. – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
The system’s ability to detect objects may fall.
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to – In tight curves.
the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the limitations of the system and – If the field of view of the camera or the
actively intervene as warranted. windshield is dirty or covered.
– If the driving stability control systems
System limits are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
Safety information engine via the Start/Stop button.
Warning diately after vehicle delivery.
The system is designed to operate in cer- – If there are constant blinding effects be-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to cause of oncoming light, for instance
conditions or other factors, the system from the sun low in the sky.
may not respond. There may be a risk of – When it is dark outside.
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re- Lane departure warning
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the
Detection range vehicle on roads with lane markings is
The detection potential of the camera is lim- about to leave the lane.
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be General information
issued late. Depending on the country version, the sys-
The following situations may not be de- tem issues a warning at speeds between
tected, for example: 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.
– Partially covered pedestrians. Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The time of the warning
– Pedestrians that are not detected as may vary depending on the current driving
such because of the viewing angle or situation.
contour.
The system does not provide a warning if
– Pedestrians outside of the detection the turn signal is set before leaving the
range. lane.
176
Safety CONTROLS
Safety information Camera
Warning
sessing road and traffic situation. There is
Do not jerk the steering wheel in response
to a warning. The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
Warning mirror clean and clear.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg- Switching on/off
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is The lane departure warning is automatically
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to activated after departure, if the function
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely was switched on the last time the engine
and actively intervene where appropriate. was stopped.

Overview Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent
Button in the vehicle
Safety system is displayed. The
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
currently in use.
Intelligent Safety button Press button again:

are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
177
CONTROLS Safety
Hold down button: garding the scope of the system’s opera-

– All Intelligent Safety systems tion and limitations.
are switched off.
– The LED goes out. Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
Display in the instrument cluster situations:
The icon illuminates green: at least – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
one lane marking was detected and fall.
warnings can be issued. – In the event of missing, worn, poorly
visible, merging, diverging, or multiple
lane markings such as in construction
Issued warning areas.
If you leave the lane – When lane markings are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking
has been detected, the steering wheel vi- – In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
brates. – When lane markings are covered by ob-
If the turn signal is switched on before jects.
changing the lane, a warning is not issued. – When driving very close to the vehicle
in front of you.
End of warning – When driving toward bright lights.
The warning is canceled in the following – When the windshield in front of the in-
situations: terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
– Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ered with stickers, etc.
– When returning to your own lane. – During calibration of the camera imme-
– When braking hard.
– When using the turn signal.
Manual Speed Limiter
System limits
Safety information Concept
The system can be used to set a speed limit,
for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex-
Warning ceeding speed limits.
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to General information
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of The system can limit the speed, starting at a
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the be driven at any speed below the set speed
information in this Owner’s Manual re- limit.
178
Safety CONTROLS
Exceeding the speed limit When the speed limit is switched on, DSC
When necessary, the speed limit can be in- Dynamic Stability Control is switched on as
tentionally overcome by stepping on the well, if needed.
gas.
Switching off
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed limit, a warning is issued. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
No brake intervention
The system switches off automatically in
If the set speed limit is reached or uninten- the following situations, for example:
tionally exceeded, such as when driving
– When shifting into reverse gear.
downhill, the vehicle is not actively braked.
– When the engine is switched off.
When the speed limit is set during a trip to
a value below the driving speed, the vehicle – When cruise control is switched on.
coasts until its driving speed drops below – On activation of Dynamic Traction Con-
the set speed limit. trol DTC or deactivation of DSC.
The displays go out.
Overview
Changing the speed limit
Steering wheel buttons, left or button: press up or down repeat-
edly until the desired speed limit is set.
Button Function
– or button: each time it is pressed
System on/off. to the resistance point, the speed limit
increases or decreases by 1 mph,
Increase the speed limit. 1 km/h.
Reduce the speed limit. past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Operation When the speed limit is set during a trip to
a value below the current speed, the vehicle
Switching on coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
Press the button on the steering Exceeding the speed limit

wheel.
The speed limit can be exceeded intention-
The current speed is accepted as the speed ally. There is no acoustic warning in this
limit. case.
If the system is switched on while the vehi- Press the accelerator pedal all the way down
cle is stationary or driving at low speeds, to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit. When the vehicle speed drops below the set
The set speed is displayed under the LIMIT speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-
or LIM indicator. vated.
179
CONTROLS Safety
Warning when the speed limit is Fatigue alert

exceeded
Concept
Visual warning
The system can detect decreasing alertness
If the set speed limit is exceeded, the LIMIT or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-
or LIM indicator flashes while the vehicle nous trips, for instance on highways. In this
speed is greater than the speed limit. situation, it is recommended that the driver
takes a break.
Acoustic warning
– If the speed limit is exceeded uninten- Safety information
tionally, a signal sounds.
– When the speed limit is reduced to be- Warning
low the vehicle speed while driving, a
signal sounds after approx. 30 seconds. The system cannot serve as a substitute
– When the speed limit is intentionally sessing one's physical state. An increasing
exceeded by stepping on the accelerator lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-
pedal all the way down, there is no sig- tected or not be detected in time. There is
nal. a risk of accident. Make sure that the
driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
Displays in the instrument cluster style to traffic conditions.
Instrument cluster without enhanced
features:
Function
The desired speed is displayed under
the LIMIT indicator. The system is switched on each time the en-
gine is started and cannot be switched off.
Instrument cluster with en- After travel has begun, the system monitors
hanced features: certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so
The desired speed is displayed that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be
under the LIM indicator. detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria
– The indicator does not light up: the sys- into account:
tem is switched off. – Personal driving style, for instance
– The indicator lights up green: the sys- steering behavior.
tem is active. – Driving conditions, for instance time,
– Display flashes green: set speed limit ex- length of trip.
ceeded. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,
the system is active and can display a rec-
Displays in the Head-up Display ommendation to take a break.
The information from the Speed Limiter can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the Control Dis-
180
Safety CONTROLS
play with the recommendation to take a At standstill

break.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
A recommendation to take a break is dis- automatically. Secure the vehicle against
played only once during an uninterrupted rolling.
trip.
After a break, another recommendation to Harder vehicle braking
take a break cannot be displayed until after In certain situations, it can be necessary to
approximately 45 minutes. bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
the Brake Assistant allows.
System limits To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
The function may be limited in the follow- brake. For a brief period, the braking pres-
ing situations and may issue an incorrect sure will be higher than the braking pres-
warning or no warning at all: sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-
– When the time is set incorrectly. ing function. This interrupts automatic
– When the vehicle speed is mainly below braking.
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
– With a sporty driving style, such as dur-
Interrupting automatic braking
ing rapid acceleration or when corner- It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
ing fast. braking in certain situations, for instance
for an evasive maneuver.
– In active driving situations, such as
when changing lanes frequently. Interrupt automatic braking:
– When the road surface is poor. – By pressing the brake pedal.
– In the event of strong side winds. – By pressing the accelerator pedal.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-
ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the
case of a break during longer trips on high-
ways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically
without intervention by the driver in cer-
tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a
further collision and the consequences
thereof.
181
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability Control
This chapter describes all standard, country- Concept
specific and optional features offered with Within the physical limits, the system helps
the series. It also describes features and to keep the vehicle on a steady course by
functions that are not necessarily available reducing engine speed and by applying
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- brake intervention to the individual wheels.
When using these functions and systems, General information
the applicable laws and regulations must be DSC detects the following unstable driving
observed. conditions, for instance:
– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-
ing.
Antilock Braking System ABS – Loss of traction of the front wheels,
which can lead to understeering.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
braking. page 183, is a version of the DSC where
The vehicle maintains its steering power drive power is optimized.
even during full brake applications, which
increases the active safety. Safety information
ABS is ready when the drive-ready state is
switched on. Warning
Brake assistant sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
limits of the system, it cannot independ-
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys- ently react to all traffic situations. There is
tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak- a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
ing capability to the furthest possible ex- traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
tent. It reduces the braking distance to a and actively intervene where appropriate.
minimum during an emergency stop. This
system utilizes all of the capabilities pro-
vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS. Warning
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake When driving with a roof load, for in-
pedal for the duration of the emergency stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,
stop. the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,
which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-
ping in critical driving situations. There
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage
182
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy- Automatic activation

namic Stability Control when driving with
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-
roof load.
tion occurs in the following situations:
– The vehicle has a flat tire.
Indicator/warning lights – When activating cruise control in the
The indicator light flashes: DSC con- TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DTC Dynamic Traction Con-
trol
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
Concept
General information DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability ity Control where drive power is optimized.
is reduced during acceleration and when The system ensures maximum drive power
driving in curves. on unusual road conditions, for instance
To increase driving stability, activate DSC unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road
again as soon as possible. surfaces, but with somewhat limited driving
stability.
Deactivating DSC When DTC is activated, the vehicle has
maximum traction. Driving stability is lim-
Press and hold this button but not ited during acceleration and when driving
longer than approx. 10 seconds, un- in curves.
til the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up in the instrument cluster and dis- Drive carefully.
plays DSC OFF. You may find it useful to briefly activate
DSC is switched off. DTC under the following special circum-
stances:
– When driving in slush or on uncleared,
Activating DSC snow-covered roads.
Press the button. – When driving off from deep snow or
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator loose ground.
light go out. – When driving with tire chains.
Indicator/warning lights Deactivating/activating DTC

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis- Dynamic Traction Control
played in the instrument cluster.
Activating DTC
The indicator light lights up: DSC is
deactivated. Press the button.
183
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument Programs

cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up. MID/GREEN
Balanced tuning of the shock absorbers for
Deactivating DTC more comfort.
Press the button again.
SPORT
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-
tor light go out. Consistently sporty tuning of the shock ab-
sorbers for greater driving agility.
Performance Control MINI Driving Modes switch

Performance Control enhances the agility of Concept
the vehicle.
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to
To increase maneuverability, wheels are fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features.
braked individually when a sporty driving
style is used. Choose between three different programs.
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch
will activate the particular program.
ALL4
Operating the programs
ALL4 is the all-wheel-drive system of your
Switch Program
vehicle. Concerted action by ALL4 and DSC
Dynamic Stability Control further optimizes SPORT
traction and driving dynamics. The ALL4 MID
all-wheel-drive system variably distributes
the driving forces to the front and rear axles GREEN
as demanded by the driving situation and
road surface.
MID
Adaptive chassis MID provides balanced tuning.
With each starting operation, MID is acti-
vated using the Start/Stop button.
Concept
The tuning of the chassis can be changed GREEN
with the system.
The system offers several different pro- Concept
grams. GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi-
The programs are selected via the MINI mize range.
Driving Modes switch.
184
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Activating GREEN Configuring SPORT

Press the MINI Driving Modes switch Via the Central Information Display (CID):
downward until GREEN is displayed in the
instrument cluster. 1. "My MINI"
Configuring GREEN 3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
Via MINI Driving Modes switch 4. "Configure SPORT"
1. Activate GREEN. 5. Select the desired setting.
2. "Configure GREEN" This configuration is retrieved when SPORT
is activated.
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when Configuring driving program
GREEN is activated. Settings can be made for the following driv-
ing programs in Drive mode:
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
– GREEN, refer to page 184.
1. "My MINI"
– SPORT, refer to page 185.
3. If necessary, "Driving mode" Displays
4. "Configure GREEN"
Program selection
Pressing the MINI Driving
This configuration is retrieved when
Modes switch displays a list of
GREEN is activated.
programs, which can be se-
lected.
SPORT
Concept Selected program
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain
for greater driving agility. The instrument cluster dis-
plays the selected program.
tuning of the chassis and suspension also
changes and SPORT can be individually
configured.
The configuration is stored for the driver
profile currently in use. Drive-off assistant
Activating SPORT
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up- Concept
ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru- This system supports driving off on uphill
ment cluster. grades. The parking brake is not required.
185
Driving off with the drive-off

assistant
1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off
without delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle
is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Servotronic
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
steering function.
The system provides the steering force with
more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-
stance, and makes steering firmer when
driving at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-
cording to the driving program, so that a
firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering
response is conveyed.
186
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options General information
A camera on the interior mirror is used to
This chapter describes all standard, country- detect vehicles driving ahead.
specific and optional features offered with Depending on the settings, the cruise con-
the series. It also describes features and trol settings may change under certain con-
functions that are not necessarily available ditions.
tions or country versions. This also applies Safety information
the applicable laws and regulations must be Warning
observed. The system cannot serve as a substitute
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
Camera-based cruise control limits of the system, it cannot independ-
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
Concept traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
Using this system, a desired speed and a and actively intervene where appropriate.
distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted
using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on Warning
clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-
brakes automatically. justed or called up by mistake. There is a
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys- risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed
tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic
that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is closely and actively intervene where ap-
maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as propriate.
the given situation allows.
The distance can be adjusted in several
steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the Warning
respective speed.
Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic ferences to other vehicles, for instance in
transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you the following situations:
brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive
– When fast approaching a slowly mov-
again shortly thereafter, the system is able
ing vehicle.
to detect this within the given system lim-
its. – Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
– When fast approaching standing ve-
hicles.
187
CONTROLS Driving comfort
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's
Watch traffic closely and actively inter- series, optional features and country speci-
vene where appropriate. fications.
Camera
Warning
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
lowing:
– On uphill grades or on a downhill The camera is installed near the interior
slope, turn the front wheels in the di- mirror.
rection of the curb. Keep the windshield in front of the interior
– On uphill grades or on a downhill mirror clean and clear.
stance with a wheel chock. Functional requirements
The system is best used on well-constructed
Overview roads.
The system is functional at speeds begin-
Buttons on the steering wheel ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
Button Function transmissions: the system can also be acti-
Cruise control on/off, refer to vated while the vehicle is stationary.
page 189. The max. speed that can be set is
Pause cruise control, refer to 85 mph/140 km/h.
page 189. Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control
Continue cruise control with the is interrupted below a speed of approx.
last setting, refer to page 190. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not
brake to a stop.
Reduce distance, refer to If distance control is switched off, refer to
page 190. page 191, higher desired speeds can be se-
Increase the distance, refer to lected as well.
page 190.
Increase speed, refer to
page 189.
Reduce speed, refer to page 189.
188
Switching on/off and interrupting With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
cruise control transmission: when canceling while station-
ary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.
Switching on
Press the button on the steering Interrupting automatically
wheel. The system is automatically interrupted in
the following situations:
Instrument cluster without enhanced – When the driver applies the brakes.
features:
– Manual transmission: when the clutch
Display in the instrument cluster pedal is depressed for a few seconds or
lights up. released while a gear is not engaged.
Instrument cluster without enhanced – If selector lever position N is set.
features: – Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
Display in the instrument cluster vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
lights up. The current speed is adopted as is deactivated.
desired speed and displayed with icon. – If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
Instrument cluster with en- – If the detection range of the camera is
hanced features: impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy
Display in the instrument precipitation or glare effects from the
cluster lights up. The current sun.
speed is adopted as desired – Manual transmission: if the vehicle in
speed and displayed with icon. front decelerates below a speed of ap-
prox. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Cruise control is active and maintains the
set speed. – With the Stop&Go function for Step-
tronic transmissions: following a sta-
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af-
on, if necessary.
ter the vehicle was braked to a stop by
the system.
Switching off
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic Setting the speed
transmissions: when switching off while
stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta- Maintaining/storing the speed
neously.
Press or button in the interrupted
Press the button on the steering state.
wheel.
When the system is switched on, the cur-
The displays go out. The stored desired rent speed is maintained and stored as the
speed is deleted. desired speed.
Interrupting manually features:
wheel.
189
The stored speed is displayed by the icon in Reduce distance

the Info Display of the instrument cluster.
Press the button repeatedly until
Instrument cluster with en- the desired distance is set.
hanced features:
The stored speed is displayed. features:
The set distance is briefly displayed
in the left part of the Info Display of the in-
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched strument cluster.
on, if necessary.
Changing the speed Increase the distance

or button: press until the desired Press the button repeatedly until
speed is set. the desired distance is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when Instrument cluster without enhanced
the road is clear. features:
– or button: each time it is pressed The set distance is briefly displayed
to the point of resistance, the desired in the left part of the Info Display of the in-
speed increases or decreases by approx. strument cluster.
1 mph/1 km/h.
– or button: each time it is pressed Continuing cruise control
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ General information
10 km/h. An interrupted cruise control can be contin-
or button: hold down to repeat the ued by calling up the stored speed.
action. Make sure that the difference between cur-
rent speed and stored speed is not too large
Adjusting the distance before calling up the stored speed. Other-
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
Safety information may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed
Warning value is deleted and cannot be called up
The system cannot serve as a substitute again:
for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to – When the system is switched off.
the system limits, braking can be late. – When the ignition is switched off.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Be aware to the traffic Calling up the stored speed and
situation at all times. Adjust the distance distance
to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance, Press the button with the system in-
possibly by braking. terrupted. Cruise control is contin-
ued with the stored values. The in-
190
strument cluster briefly displays the – Display lights up green: system is active,
selected distance. the display indicates the desired speed.
– Display lights up orange: system is in-
Switching distance control on/off terrupted, the display indicates the
stored speed.
Safety information – No display: system is switched off.
Instrument cluster with en-

Warning hanced features:
The system does not react to traffic driv- – Display lights up green:
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains system is active, the dis-
the stored speed. There may be a risk of play indicates the desired
accident or risk of damage to property. Ad- speed.
just the desired speed to the traffic condi-
– Speed value is illuminated gray: system
tions and brake as needed.
is interrupted.
– No display: system is switched off.
Switching distance control off
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that
Distance control can be switched off and on the conditions necessary for operation are
when driving with cruise control activated. not currently fulfilled.
Press and hold this button.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Or:
Distance display
Press and hold this button.
Distance 1

cluster lights up. Distance 2
To switch distance control back on, press

one of the two buttons again briefly. Distance 3
After changing over distance control, a
Check Control message is displayed.
Distance 4
Displays in the instrument cluster This value is set automatically af-
ter the system is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
Instrument cluster without enhanced Instrument clusters without enhanced fea-
features: tures: selected distance from the vehicle
driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left
In addition to the indicator light, the hand portion of the Info Display.
desired speed is displayed in the Info Dis-
play.
191
Detected vehicle System interrupted without detected

vehicle.
features:
System interrupted with detected ve-
Icon lights up orange: a vehicle has hicle.
been detected ahead of you.
Instrument cluster with en- Displays in the Head-up Display

hanced features:
The information from Active Cruise Control
Vehicle symbol is displayed: a can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-
vehicle has been detected play.
ahead of you.
With the Stop&Go function for Step- System limits

tronic transmissions:
Detection range
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle
has driven away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti-
vate ACC as follows:
– By briefly pressing the accelerator
pedal.
– By pressing the RES CNCL button.
– By pressing the or button.
Indicator/warning lights The detection capacity of the system and

the automatic braking capacity are limited.
features: Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might
not be detected.
Icon flashes orange.
Instrument cluster with enhanced Deceleration

features: The system does not decelerate in the fol-
Vehicle symbol flashes. lowing situations:
– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly
The conditions are not adequate for the sys-
slow-moving road users.
tem to work.
– For red traffic lights.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by – For cross traffic.
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator – For oncoming traffic.
pedal. – Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-
Icon flashes red and a signal sounds: ing lighting at night.
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
192
Merging vehicles Cornering
A vehicle driving in front of you is not de- When the desired speed is too high for a
tected until it is completely within the same curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Be-
lane as your vehicle. cause curves may not be anticipated in ad-
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly vance, drive into a curve at an appropriate
merges into your lane, the system may not speed.
be able to automatically restore the selected The system has a limited detection range.
distance. It may not be possible to restore Situations can arise in tight curves where a
the selected distance in certain situations, vehicle driving ahead will not be detected
including if you are driving significantly or will be detected very late.
faster than vehicles driving ahead of you,
for instance when rapidly approaching a
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you
is reliably detected, the system requests
that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
With Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmission: driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
When you approach a curve the system may
off automatically; for example:
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
– On steep uphill grades. to the bend of the curve. If the system de-
– In front of bumps in the road. celerates you may compensate it by briefly
In these cases, press on the accelerator accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal. pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under
unfavorable weather or light conditions:
– Poorer vehicle recognition.
– Short-term interruptions for vehicles
that are already recognized.
193
Examples of unfavorable weather or light Cruise control

conditions:
– Wet conditions.
Concept
– Snowfall.
Using this system, a desired speed can be
– Slush. adjusted using the buttons on the steering
– Fog. wheel. The system maintains the desired
– Glare. speed. The system accelerates and brakes
automatically as needed.
Drive attentively, and react to the current
traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-
tively, for instance by braking, steering or General information
evading. The system is functional at speeds begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Engine power Depending on the settings, the cruise con-
The desired speed may not be maintained trol settings may change under certain con-
on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi- ditions.
cient.
Safety information
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the Warning
system fails or was automatically deacti- The system cannot serve as a substitute
vated. for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
The system may be limited in the following sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
situations: limits of the system, it cannot independ-
– When an object was not correctly de- ently react to all traffic situations. There is
tected. a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the Warning
windshield is dirty or covered.
The use of the system can lead to an in-
– When driving toward bright lights. creased risk of accidents in the following
– Up to 20 seconds after the start of the situations, for instance:
engine, via the Start/Stop button. – On winding roads.
– During calibration of the camera imme- – In heavy traffic.
– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or
wet conditions, or on a loose road
surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
194
Overview Cruise control is active and maintains the

set speed.
Buttons on the steering wheel DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
Switching off
page 195. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 195. The displays go out. The stored desired
Continue cruise control with the speed is deleted.
last setting, refer to page 196.
Interrupting manually
Increase speed, refer to
page 195. When active, press the button on
the steering wheel.
Reduce speed, refer to page 195.
Interrupting automatically
Switching on/off and interrupting The system is automatically interrupted in
cruise control the following situations:
– When the driver applies the brakes.
Switching on – If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
Press the button on the steering seconds or released while a gear is not
wheel. engaged.
– If the gear engaged is too high for the
Instrument cluster without enhanced current speed.
features: – If selector lever position N is set.
The indicator light in the instrument – Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
cluster lights up. vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is deactivated.
features: – If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
The current speed is adopted as the
desired speed and is displayed with the
symbol in the instrument cluster. Setting the speed
Instrument cluster with en- Maintaining/storing the speed

hanced features: Press or button in the interrupted
Display in the instrument state.
cluster lights up. The current When the system is switched on, the cur-
speed is adopted as the speed rent speed is maintained and stored as the
limit. desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
195
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched Displays in the instrument cluster

on, if necessary.
Indicator light
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired features:
speed is set.
Depending on how the vehicle is
If active, the displayed speed is stored and equipped, the indicator light in the instru-
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when ment cluster indicates whether the system
the road is clear. is switched on.
to the point of resistance, the desired Instrument cluster with en-
speed increases or decreases by approx. hanced features:
1 mph/1 km/h. The indicator in the instru-
– or button: each time it is pressed ment cluster lights up: the sys-
past the resistance point, the desired tem is switched on.
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Desired speed and stored speed
– or button: press button to resist-
ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler- Instrument cluster without enhanced
ates or decelerates without pressure on features:
the accelerator pedal. After the button is The desired speed is displayed to-
released, the vehicle maintains its final gether with the symbol.
speed. Pressing the switch beyond the – Display lights up green: system is active,
resistance point causes the vehicle to the display indicates the desired speed.
accelerate more rapidly.
– Display lights up orange: system is in-
terrupted, the display indicates the
Continuing cruise control stored speed.
General information – No display: system is switched off.
An interrupted cruise control can be contin- Instrument cluster with en-
ued by calling up the stored speed. hanced features:
Make sure that the difference between cur- The desired speed is displayed
rent speed and stored speed is not too large together with the symbol.
before calling up the stored speed. Other- – Display lights up green:
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating system is active, the dis-
may occur. play indicates the desired
speed.
Calling up the stored speed
– Display lights up gray: system is inter-
Press the button on the steering rupted, the display indicates the stored
wheel. speed.
The stored speed is reached again and main- – No display: system is switched off.
tained.
196
Instrument cluster without enhanced fea- Safety information

tures:
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that Warning
the conditions necessary for operation are
not currently fulfilled. The system cannot serve as a substitute
System limits sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle sur-
Engine power roundings closely and actively intervene
The desired speed is also maintained down- where appropriate.
hill, but may not be maintained on uphill
grades if engine power is insufficient.
Warning
PDC Park Distance Control Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-
tance Control is activated, the warning can
be delayed due to physical circumstances.
Concept There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
PDC is a support when parking. The system to property. Avoid approaching an object
detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve- too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC
hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in Park Distance Control is not yet active.
front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-
jects that you are approaching slowly are in-
dicated by signal tones and a visual display. Overview
General information With front PDC: button in vehicle

The ultrasound sensors for measuring the
distances are located in the bumpers.
The range, depending on obstacles and en-
vironmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-
lowing situations:
– By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the object.
Park assistance button
– By the rear middle sensors at ap-
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
– When a collision is imminent. Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the
PDC, for instance in the bump-
ers.
197
Functional requirements – On: the LED lights up.

Ensure full functionality: – Off: the LED goes out.
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with The rearview camera image is displayed if
stickers, bicycle racks or similar. the reverse gear is engaged when pressing
– Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. the park assistance button.
Depending on the equipment version, the
Switching on/off system cannot be switched off manually if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Warning
The system switches on automatically in the
Signal tones
– If selector lever position R is engaged
An intermittent tone indicates when the ve-
when the engine is running.
hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an
The rearview camera also switches on. object is detected to the left rear of the ve-
– With front PDC: when obstacles are de- hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
tected behind or in front of the vehicle speaker.
by PDC and the speed is slower than ap- The shorter the distance to the object, the
prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. shorter the intervals.
With front PDC: automatic activation on ob- When the distance to a detected object is
stacle detection can be switched off. Via the less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin-
Central Information Display (CID): uous tone is sounded.
1. "My MINI" With front PDC: when objects are simulta-
2. "Vehicle settings" neously located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-
3. "Parking" nal is sounded.
4. "Automatic PDC Activation": depending The signal tone is switched off, when selec-
on the vehicle equipment. tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles
5. "Automatic PDC Activation" with Steptronic transmission.
The setting is stored for the driver pro-
file currently used. Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to
Automatic deactivation during the entertainment volume can be adjusted.
forward travel 1. "My MINI"
The system switches off when a certain 2. "System settings"
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
3. "Tone"
Switch the system back on, if needed.
4. "Volume settings"
With front PDC: switching on/off 5. "PDC"
manually 6. Set the desired value.
Press the park assistance button. The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
198
Visual warning – If cargo protrudes.

The approach of the vehicle to an object can – Under certain weather conditions such
be shown on the Control Display. Objects as high relative humidity, wet condi-
that are farther away are already displayed tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
on the Control Display before a signal wind.
sounds. – With tow bars and trailer couplings of
A display appears as soon as Park Distance other vehicles.
Control (PDC) is activated. – With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
The range of the sensors is represented in – With moving objects.
colors: red, green and yellow. – With elevated, protruding objects such
When the image of the rearview camera is as ledges or cargo.
displayed, the switch can be made to PDC: – With objects with corners and sharp
"Rear view camera" edges.
– With objects with a fine surface struc-
System limits ture such as fences.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
Safety information
– Low objects already displayed, for in-
stance curbs, can move into the blind
Warning area of the sensors before or after a con-
The system is designed to operate in cer- tinuous tone sounds.
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system False warnings
may not respond. There may be a risk of The system may issue a warning under the
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- following conditions even though there is
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the no obstacle within the detection range:
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera- – In heavy rain.
tion and limitations. – When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
– When sensors are covered in snow.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
– On rough road surfaces.
The detection of objects with ultrasonic
– On uneven surfaces, such as speed
measurements can run into physical limits,
bumps.
for instance under the following conditions:
– In large buildings with right angles and
– For small children and animals.
smooth walls, for instance in under-
– For persons with certain clothing, for in- ground garages.
stance coats.
– In automatic car washes.
– With external interference of the ultra-
– Due to heavy exhaust.
sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines. – Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-
stance sweeping machines, high pres-
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
sure steam cleaners or neon lights.
aged or out of position.
199
The malfunction is signaled by a contin- Overview

uous tone alternating between the front
and rear speakers. As soon as the mal- Depending on the vehicle equipment:
function due to other ultrasound sources button in the vehicle
is no longer present, the system is again
fully functional.
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,
switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-
stacle detection, for instance in car washes;
see Switching on/off.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Park assistance button
Red icon is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Con-
trol Display.
Camera
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by
a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The The camera lens is located in the handle of
area behind the vehicle is shown on the the tailgate.
Control Display.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
If necessary, clean the camera lens.
Safety information
Switching on/off
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute Switching on automatically
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- The system is switched on automatically if
sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk selector lever position R is engaged when
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic the engine is running.
conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle sur-
roundings closely and actively intervene Automatic deactivation during
where appropriate. forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
200
Switch the system back on, if needed. Obstacles are marked, depending on the
vehicle equipment.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
switching on/off manually Lanes
Press the park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown
on the Control Display.
Switching the view via the Central

Information Display (CID) Lanes can be superimposed on the image of
If the rearview camera view is not dis- the rearview camera.
played, change the view via the Central In- Lanes help you to estimate the space re-
formation Display (CID): quired when parking and maneuvering on
"Rear view camera" level roads.
The rearview camera image is displayed. Lanes depend on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer-
Display on the Control Display ing wheel movements.
Functional requirements Turning radius lines

– The rearview camera is switched on.
– The tailgate is fully closed.
– Keep the recording range of the camera
open.
Protruding cargo or carrier systems and
trailers that are not connected to a
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc-
tions.
Activating assistance functions Turning radius lines can be superimposed

More than one assistance function can be on the image of the rearview camera.
active at the same time. Turning radius lines show the course of the
– Parking aid lines smallest possible turning radius on a level
"Parking aid lines" road.
Lanes and turning radius lines are indi- Only one turning radius line is displayed af-
cated. ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-
tain angle.
– Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
201
Obstacle marking 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point

where the lane covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-

cle markings can be faded into the image of
the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark- Display settings
ings match the markings of the PDC Park
Distance Control. Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
Parking using lanes and turning 1. Select the icon.
radius lines 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ting is reached and press the Controller.
radius lines lead to within the limits of
the parking space. Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the icon.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob-
jects such as ledges may not be recognized
by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
assistance functions also consider data from
the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Dis-
play may be closer than they appear. There-
202
fore, do not estimate the distance from the Safety information

objects on the display.
Warning
Parking assistant The system cannot serve as a substitute
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
Concept limits of the system, it cannot independ-
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle
over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-
This system assists the driver in parking age to property, among other potential
parallel to the road. damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
General information
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-
Parking assistant handling is divided into
tance Control applies in addition.
three steps:
– Switching on and activating. Overview
– Parking space search.
– Parking. Button in the vehicle
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best
possible parking line and takes control of
steering during the parking operation.
System status and instructions on required
actions are displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control. Park assistance button
203
Ultrasound sensors – The parking brake is released.

– When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn sig-
nal must be switched on.
Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button
Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-
ing spaces are located on the wheel hous- The current status of the parking space
ing. search is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automati-
Functional requirements cally.
Ultrasound sensors Switching on with reverse gear

Ensure full functionality: Shift into reverse.
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with The current status of the parking space
stickers. search is indicated on the Control Display.
– Keep the sensors clean and unob- To activate: "Parking Assistant"
structed.
Display on the Control Display
For measuring parking spaces
System activated/deactivated
– Maximum speed while driving forward
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. Icon Meaning
– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-
hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
Suitable parking space not activated.
– Gaps behind an object that has a min. The system is activated.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Gap between two objects with a mini-
mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For the parking operation

– Doors and tailgate are closed.
204
Parking space search and system and at a distance of maximum

status 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search
and possible parking spaces are dis-
played on the Control Display, refer to
page 204.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
The parking assistant takes control of
steering during the parking operation.
The driver takes over braking and accel-
– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park- erating.
ing assistant is activated and the park- The best possible parking position will
ing space search is active. come after gear change on the station-
– Control Display shows suitable parking ary vehicle - wait for the automatic
spaces at the edge of the road next to steering wheel move.
the vehicle symbol. When the parking The end of the parking operation is indi-
assistant is active, suitable parking cated on the Control Display.
spaces are highlighted. 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
– The parking operation is needed.
active. The system takes
over the steering. Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at
any time:
– Parking space search is always active – Press the park assistance button.
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is
deactivated. When the system is deacti- – "Parking Assistant"
vated, the displays on the Control Dis-
play are shown in gray. Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in
Parking using the parking assistant the following situations:
– If the driver grasps the steering wheel
Parking or takes over steering.
– If a gear is selected that does not match
1. Press the park assistance button or the instruction on the Control Display.
shift into reverse gear to switch on the
parking assistant, refer to page 204. Ac- – If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
tivate the parking assistant, if needed. 6 mph/10 km/h.
Parking assistant is activated. – Possibly on snow-covered or slippery
road surfaces.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
205
– If a maximum number of parking at- Functional limitations

tempts or the time taken for parking is The system may be limited in the following
exceeded. situations:
– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis- – On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
plays clearances that are too small. roads.
– When switching into other functions of – On slippery ground.
the radio.
– With accumulations of leaves/snow in
A Check Control message is displayed. the parking space.
Resuming – With a mounted emergency wheel.
An interrupted parking operation can be – With ditches or edges, for instance an
continued, if needed. edge of a port.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to Limits of ultrasonic measurement
page 204, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display. The detection of objects with ultrasonic
measurements can run into physical limits,
for instance under the following conditions:
Switching off
– For small children and animals.
The system can be switched off as follows:
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
– Press the park assistance button.
stance coats.
– With external interference of the ultra-
– Switching off the ignition. sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
System limits – When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
Safety information
– If cargo protrudes.
– Under certain weather conditions such
Warning as high relative humidity, wet condi-
The system is designed to operate in cer- tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to wind.
conditions or other factors, the system – With tow bars and trailer couplings of
may not respond. There may be a risk of other vehicles.
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the – With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
information in this Owner’s Manual re- – With moving objects.
garding the scope of the system’s opera- – With elevated, protruding objects such
tion and limitations. as ledges or cargo.
– With objects with corners and sharp
No parking assistance edges.
The parking assistant does not offer assis- – With objects with a fine surface struc-
tance in the following situations: ture such as fences.
– In tight curves. – For objects with porous surfaces.
206
– Low objects already displayed, for in-

stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
– The parking assistant may identify park-
ing spaces that are not suitable for park-
ing.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending
on the tire size.
Malfunction
The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-
tem checked by a dealer's service center or
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
207
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options – Emission tested passenger compart-
ment.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Microfilter.
specific and optional features offered with – Air conditioning system to control the
the series. It also describes features and temperature, air flow and recirculated-
functions that are not necessarily available air mode.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Depending on the equipment specification:
– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
When using these functions and systems, – Automatic climate control.
the applicable laws and regulations must be – Parked-car ventilation.
observed.
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by
the following components:
208
Climate control CONTROLS
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings 6 Air recirculation mode

2 Air flow 7 Rear window defroster
3 Temperature 8 Windshield defroster
4 Seat heating, right 89 9 Seat heating, left 89
5 Air conditioning
Climate control functions in detail Temperature
Switching the system on/off Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on the
Switching on set temperature.
Set any air flow.
Adjusting
Switching off Turn the wheel to set the de-
Turn the wheel for air flow all sired temperature.
the way to the left.
209
Air conditioning ter a certain amount of time, depending on

the outside temperature.
Concept With extended air recirculation mode, the
The air in the car's interior will be cooled air quality in the interior deteriorates and
and dehumidified and, depending on the window fogging increases.
temperature setting, warmed again. If the windows fog over, switch off air recir-
culation mode and increase the air flow, if
Functional requirement needed.
The car's interior can only be cooled with
the engine running. Air flow, manual
Switching on/off Concept

Press the button. The air flow for climate control can be ad-
justed manually.
The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Adjusting
Depending on the weather, the windshield Turn the ring to set the de-
may fog up briefly when the engine is sired air flow.
started.
The higher the air flow, the
The cooling mode produces condensation, more effective the heating or
refer to page 243, that will exit from below cooling will be.
the vehicle.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be
Air recirculation mode reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- Manual air distribution
tants in the immediate environment by tem-
porarily suspending the supply of outside Concept
air. The system then recirculates the air The air distribution for climate control can
flow within the vehicle. be adjusted manually.
Operation Adjusting
Press the button: Turn the wheel to select the
The LED is illuminated when recir- desired program or the desired
culated-air mode is switched on. The supply intermediate setting.
of outside air is shut off.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte- – Windows.
rior. – Upper body region.
To prevent window condensation, recircu- – Floor area.
lated-air mode switches off automatically af- – Windows, upper body region, and
floor area.
210
To defrost windows and remove For permanent activation, press the button
condensation for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,
Make the following settings to defrost the press the button again.
windows and remove condensation: The rear window defroster can only be acti-
– Direct the air distribution onto the win- vated continuously at an outside tempera-
dows. ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.
– Increasing the air flow. When GREEN drive mode is activated, the
– Increase the temperature. heating output is reduced.
– Switch on air conditioning if needed.
Microfilter
Windshield defroster In external and recirculated-air mode, the
microfilter filters dust and pollen from the
Press the button. The LED lights up. air.
The front window defroster Have this filter changed during vehicle
switches off automatically after a certain maintenance, refer to page 285.
period of time.
Rear window defroster

Press the button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
off automatically after a certain period of
time.
211
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left 9 Maximum cooling

2 Display 10 Air conditioning
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 11 Air recirculation mode
4 AUTO program 12 Rear window defroster
5 Air distribution, manual 13 Windshield defroster
6 Display 14 To defrost windows and remove conden-
7 Temperature, right sation
8 Seat heating, right 89 15 Seat heating, left 89
Climate control functions in detail Switching off

Turn wheel for air flow to the
Switching the system on/off left until the control switches
off.
Switching on
Set any air flow.
Temperature
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the
set temperature as quickly as possible, if
212
necessary by using the maximum cooling or Maximum cooling

heating power, and then keeps it constant.
Concept
Adjusting The system is set to the lowest temperature,
Turn the wheel to set the de- maximum air flow and recirculated-air
sired temperature. mode.
The function is available at outside temper-
Do not rapidly switch between different atures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with
temperature settings. The automatic climate the engine running.
control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature. Switching on/off
Press the button.
Air conditioning The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled Air flows out of the vents to the upper body
and dehumidified and, depending on the region. The vents need to be open for this.
temperature setting, warmed again. The air flow can be adjusted when maxi-
mum cooling is switched on.
The car's interior can only be cooled with AUTO program
the engine running.
Concept
Switching on/off The AUTO program cools, ventilates or
Press the button. heats the car's interior automatically.
The LED is illuminated with air con- For this, the air flow, air distribution and
ditioning switched on. temperature are regulated depending on the
settings and the interior temperature.
Depending on the weather, the windshield
may fog up briefly when the engine is Switching on/off
started.
Press the button.
Air conditioning is switched on automati-
The LED is illuminated with the
cally with the AUTO program.
AUTO program switched on.
The cooling mode produces condensation,
refer to page 243, that will exit from below Depending on the selected temperature,
the vehicle. AUTO intensity and outside influences, the
air is directed to the windshield, side win-
dows, upper body, and into the floor area.
Point the side vents toward the side win-
dows.
213
The following features are switched on au- Turning on/off

tomatically with the AUTO program:
Press button repeatedly to select an
– Air conditioning, refer to page 213. operating mode:
To switch off the program: press the button
again or manually adjust the air distribu- – LEDs off: outside air flows in continu-
tion. ously.
– Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air
Controlling the intensity of the air flow control: a sensor detects pollutants in
With the AUTO program switched on, the the outside air and shuts off automati-
intensity can be adjusted. This changes the cally.
automatic control for the air mass. – Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air into the vehicle is
Turn the wheel to set the de- permanently disabled.
sired intensity from soft to in-
tensive. To prevent window condensation, recircu-
lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
ter a certain amount of time, depending on
the outside temperature.
The set intensity is displayed via the posi-
tion of the illuminated LED segment. If windows are fogged over, switch off the
recirculating mode and press the AUTO but-
ton. Make sure that air can flow to the
Automatic recirculated-air control
windshield.
(AUC)/recirculated-air mode
Air flow, manual
Concept
The automatic recirculated-air control Concept
(AUC) recognizes pollutants in the outside
The air flow for climate control can be ad-
air. The outside air supply is shut off and
justed manually.
the interior air is recirculated.
General information
General information
To adjust the air flow manually switch off
If the system is activated, a sensor detects
AUTO program first.
pollutants in the outside air and controls the
shut-off automatically.
Adjusting
If the system is deactivated, outside air con-
tinuously flows into the car's interior. Turn the ring to set the de-
sired air flow.
With constant air recirculation mode, the
air quality in the car's interior deteriorates
and window fogging increases.
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed
tants in the immediate environment by tem-
via illuminated LED segments.
porarily suspending the supply of outside
air. The system then recirculates the air The air flow of the automatic climate con-
flow within the vehicle. trol may be reduced automatically to save
battery power.
214
Manual air distribution Rear window defroster

Concept
The rear window defroster switches
The air distribution for climate control can
off automatically after a certain period of
be adjusted manually.
time.
Adjusting For permanent activation, press the button
for longer than 3 seconds. To deactivate,
Press the button repeatedly to se- press the button again.
lect a program:
The rear window defroster can only be acti-
– Windows, upper body region, and floor vated continuously at an outside tempera-
area. ture below approx. 41 ℉/5 ℃.
– Upper body region and floor area. When GREEN drive mode is activated, the
– Floor area. heating output is reduced.
– Windows and floor area.
– Windows.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode, the
– Windows and upper body region.
microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters
– Upper body region. dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of
the air.
To defrost windows and remove Have this filter changed during vehicle
condensation maintenance, refer to page 285.
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed Ventilation
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows.
Setting
Switching on/off The air flow directions can be individually
Press the button. adjusted:
The LED is illuminated with the – Direct ventilation:
system switched on. The air flow is directly pointed onto the
person. The air flow heats or cools no-
The air flow can be adjusted with the pro- ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem-
gram active. perature.
If there is window condensation, switch on – Indirect ventilation:
the climate control function as well. If the vents are fully or partly closed, the
air is directly routed into the car's inte-
Windshield defroster rior.
The front window defroster
switches off automatically after a certain
period of time.
215
Front ventilation activation times. The system remains

switched on for 30 minutes.
The parked-car ventilation system is oper-
ated via the Central Information Display
(CID).
– Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-
ready state.
– Direct operation or preset activation
– Turn knob for continuous opening and time: does not depend on outside tem-
closing of the vents. perature.
– Swivel the vents to alter the direction of – Battery is sufficiently charged.
the vent flow, arrows. If parked-car ventilation is switched on,
the vehicle battery will be discharged.
Thus, limit the maximum activation time
Ventilation in the rear to save the vehicle battery. The system
will be available again after the engine
is started or after a short trip.
– Make sure that the vehicle's date and
time are set correctly.
– Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly

– Lever for changing the air flow direc- 1. "My MINI"
tion, arrow 1. 2. "Vehicle settings"
– Thumbwheel for variable opening and
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
closing of the vents, arrow 2.
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
The icon on the automatic climate con-
Parked-car ventilation trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Preselecting the activation time

Concept Via the Central Information Display (CID):
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the
car's interior and lowers its temperature, if 1. "My MINI"
needed. 2. "Vehicle settings"
General information
4. "Comfort ventilation"
The parked-car ventilation can be switched
on and off directly or by using two preset
216
5. Select the desired activation time.

6. Set the desired time.
Activating the activation time

1. "My MINI"
4. "For start time at:"
Activate the desired activation time.
trol lights up when the activation time is ac-
tivated.
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within
the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be
reactivated.
217
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

specific and optional features offered with The operation of remote-controlled sys-
the series. It also describes features and tems with the integrated universal remote
functions that are not necessarily available control, such as the garage door, may re-
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
tions or country versions. This also applies coming jammed in a garage door. There is
to safety-related functions and systems. a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
When using these functions and systems, erty. Make sure that the area of movement
the applicable laws and regulations must be of the respective system is clear during
observed. programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held
transmitter.
Integrated Universal Remote
Control
Compatibility
Concept If this symbol is printed on the pack-
aging or in the owner's manual of the
The integrated Universal Remote Control in system to be controlled, the system
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func- is generally compatible with the integrated
tions of remote-controlled systems such as Universal Remote Control.
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-
tems. Additional questions are answered by:
– A dealer's service center or another
General information qualified service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control – www.homelink.com on the Internet.
replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans-
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
tex Corporation.
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular sys-
tem is required in order to program the re-
mote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage
door drive, near metal objects to ensure the
best possible operation.
218
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Overview down the interior mirror button and re-

peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. – The LED lights up green: program-
ming completed.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: programming
is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
1 LED form this procedure three times to
2 Programmable keys complete the programming proce-
dure.
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
If the integrated universal remote
control remains nonoperational, con-
Programming tinue with the special features for
change code wireless systems.
General information – LED does not flash green after
The battery of the hand-held transmitter 60 seconds: programming not com-
must be fully charged at the time of pro- pleted.
gramming to ensure an optimal range of the Repeat steps 3 to 6.
integrated universal remote control.
To program other functions on other but-
1. Switch on the ignition. tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
2. Initial setup:
Special feature of the rolling code
Press and hold the two outer buttons on wireless system
the interior mirror simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the LED If you are unable to operate the system af-
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro- ter repeated programming, please check if
gramming of the buttons on the interior the system to be controlled features a roll-
mirror. ing code radio system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
programmed. The LED on the interior For systems with a rolling code radio sys-
mirror will slowly begin flashing orange. tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the trol and the system also have to be
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 synchronized.
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the Please read the owner's manual to find out
interior mirror. The required distance how to synchronize the system.
depends on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
5. Press and hold the button of the desired second person.
function on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing the universal remote control
Canada: if programming with the hand- with the system:
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
219
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re- Press the button on the interior mir-
mote-controlled system. ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
form this procedure three times to
2. Program the relevant button on the inte- complete the programming proce-
rior mirror as described. dure.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing but- If the integrated universal remote
ton on the system being programmed, control remains nonoperational, con-
e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. tinue with the special features for
30 seconds for the next step. change code wireless systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on – LED does not flash green after
the interior mirror for approximately 60 seconds: programming not com-
3 seconds and then release it. If neces- pleted.
sary, repeat this step up to three times
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
in order to finish synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the pro- If the programming procedure is not com-
grammed function will be carried out. pleted, the previous programming will re-
main unchanged.
Reprogramming individual buttons
Operation
2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-
ton to be programmed. Warning
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir- The operation of remote-controlled sys-
ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec- tems with the integrated universal remote
onds, release the button. control, such as the garage door, may re-
sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the coming jammed in a garage door. There is
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the erty. Make sure that the area of movement
interior mirror. The required distance of the respective system is clear during
depends on the hand-held transmitter. programming and operation. Also follow
5. Press and hold the button of the desired the safety information of the hand-held
function on the hand-held transmitter. transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold The system, such as the garage door, can be
down the interior mirror button and re- operated using the button on the interior
peatedly press and release the hand-held mirror while the engine is running or when
transmitter button for 2 seconds. the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
system until the function is activated. The
– The LED lights up green: the pro- interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-
gramming procedure is completed. less signal is being transmitted.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: the hand-held Deleting stored functions
transmitter was detected but pro- All stored functions will be deleted. The
gramming is not complete. functions cannot be deleted individually.
220
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the Operating concept
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
Various functions can be called up by press-
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in-
ing the control button with a pointed object,
terior mirror flashes green rapidly.
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The following setting options are
displayed in succession, depending on how
Digital compass long the control button is pressed:
– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
Overview – 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the ve-
hicle so that the compass operates correctly;
1 Control button refer to World map with compass zones.
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The compass shows the current driving di-
rection.
221
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap- 1. Make sure that there are no large metal-
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the lic objects or overhead power lines near
set compass zone appears in the mirror. the vehicle and that there is sufficient
2. To change the zone setting, press the room to drive around in a circle.
control button quickly and repeatedly 2. Set the currently applicable compass
until the number of the compass zone zone.
that corresponds with your location ap- 3. Press and hold the control button for ap-
pears in the mirror. prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
The set zone is stored automatically. The on the display. Next, drive in a complete
compass is ready for use again after approx- circle at least once at a speed of no more
imately 10 seconds. than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points
Calibrating the digital compass of the compass.
The digital compass must be calibrated in
the event of the following: Left/right-hand steering
– The wrong compass point is displayed. The digital compass is already set for right
or left-hand steering at the factory.
– The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direc-
tion of travel. Setting the language
– Not all points of the compass are dis- Press and hold the control button for ap-
played. prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the
222
control button again to switch between Cigarette lighter

English "E" and German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after ap- Safety information
proximately 10 seconds.
Warning
Sun visor Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can
cause burns. Flammable materials can ig-
Glare shield nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is
To provide protection against glare, fold the held against the objects. There is a risk of
sun visor down or pivot it to the side. fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage
Vanity mirror age. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by
its handle. Make sure that children do not
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor use the cigarette lighter.
behind a cover.
When the cover is opened, the mirror light-
ing switches on. NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
Ashtray/cigarette lighter damage to property, among other potential
damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
Overview socket cover again after using the socket.
Operation
Push in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be
removed as soon as it pops
back out.
The ashtray is located in one of the frontal

cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in Sockets
the center console.
Concept
Ashtray The lighter socket can be used as a socket
for electrical equipment while the ignition
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the
is switched on or the engine is running.
ashtray from the cup holder.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
223
Do not damage the socket by using non- In the center console

compatible connectors.
Safety information
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's in-
terior during unfolding. There is a risk of Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
injury. Make sure that devices and cables
are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.
In the cargo area
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt electrical
system can be overloaded or damaged.
among other potential damage. Only con-
nect battery chargers for the vehicle bat-
tery to the starting aid terminals in the en- The socket is located on the right side in
gine compartment. the cargo area.
NOTICE
USB port
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential General information
damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or Follow the information regarding the con-
socket cover again after using the socket. nection of mobile devices to the USB port in
the section on USB connections, refer to
page 55.
224
In the front center console Under the center armrest
The USB port is located in the front of the The USB port is located under the center
center console. armrest.
Properties: Properties:
– USB port Type A. – USB port Type C.
– For charging mobile devices and for – For charging mobile devices and for
data transfer. data transfer.
– Charge current: max. 1.5 A. – Charge current: max. 3 A.
In the rear center console

Wireless charging tray
Concept
The wireless charging tray enables the fol-
lowing functions to be performed without
cables:
– Charging the rechargeable battery of a
mobile phone with Qi capability and of
other mobile devices, which support the
One USB dual charge socket is located in Qi standard.
the rear center console. – Connect the mobile phone to the exter-
Properties: nal antenna.
– USB port Type C. Depending on the country, this provides
for better network reception and a con-
– For charging of mobile devices. sistent reproduction quality.
– Charge current: max. 3 A.
General information
When inserting the mobile phone, make
sure there are no objects between it and the
wireless charging tray.
During charging, the surface of the tray and
the mobile phone may become warm.
225
Higher temperatures may lead to a reduc-

tion in the charge current through the mo- NOTICE
bile phone, and in isolated cases the charg- The tray is intended for mobile phones up
ing process is paused temporarily. Follow to a particular size. Forceful inserting of
the relevant instructions in the mobile the mobile phone into the tray can damage
phone owner's manual. the tray or the mobile phone. There is a
NOTE potential damage. Observe the maximum
This device has been tested for human ex- dimensions for mobile phones. Do not
posure limits and found compliant at a mini- force the mobile phone into the tray.
mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during opera-
tion.
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be Functional requirements
maintained in every direction when operat- – Ignition or standby state is switched on.
ing the device. – The mobile phone must compatibly sup-
port the required Qi standard. Compati-
ble mobile phones, refer to page 53.
If the mobile phone does not support the
Qi standard, the mobile phone can be
charged using a special Qi-compatible
charging case.
– Use only protective jackets and covers
up to a maximum thickness of
0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging
Mounting position of the product. function may be impaired.
– The mobile phone must not exceed the
maximum size of approximately 5.9 x
Safety information 3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.
Warning Overview
When charging a device that meets the Qi The wireless charging tray is located in the
standard in the wireless charging tray, any center armrest.
metal objects located between the device
and the tray can become very hot. Placing
storage devices or electronic cards, such
as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips
or cards for signal transmission, between
the device and the tray may impair the
card function. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. When charg-
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
objects between the device and the tray.
226
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue The mobile phone is charging.
Depending on the model, the
blue LED is no longer illuminated
once the inserted mobile phone
with Qi capability is fully
charged.
1 Front holder with LED
2 Storage area Or- The mobile phone is not charg-
ange ing.
3 Movable clamp
Temperature on the mobile
phone possibly too high or for-
Inserting the mobile phone eign object in the charging tray.
1. Open the center armrest. Red The mobile phone is not charg-
2. Push back the clamp. ing.
3. Insert the mobile phone with the display Contact a dealer’s service center
facing upward in the direction of the or another qualified service cen-
front holder, arrow 1. ter or repair shop.
System limits
At high temperatures on the mobile phone
or in the vehicle, the charging functions of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer work.
LTE-Compensator - Information
and User Manual
4. Place the mobile phone in the storage Your car is equipped with a wireless charg-
area, arrow 2. ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone
5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the and connect it to the mobile network. To en-
mobile phone in the tray. sure the best possible connection a signal
6. Close the center armrest. booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in con-
junction with the WCA. The following para-
graphs refer to this booster:
Removing the mobile phone
This is a CONSUMER device.
1. Open the center armrest.
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS
2. Push the clamp back and remove the DEVICE with your wireless provider and
mobile phone. have your provider's consent. Most wireless
providers consent to the use of Compensa-
tors. Some providers may not consent to the
use of this device on their network. If you
227
are unsure, contact your provider. You tennas or coupling devices will cause the
MUST operate this device with approved an- cease of the booster´s operating license.
tennas and cables as specified by the manu- The booster device fulfills the network pro-
facturer. Antennas MUST be installed at tection standards as required by the FCC,
least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You such as intermodulation limits, oscillation
MUST cease operating this device immedi- detection and gain limits.
ately if requested by the FCC or a licensed
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
wireless service provider. Warning E911 lo-
cation information may not be provided or Model Number: LTECOMPB0
may be inaccurate for calls served by using Part Number: 6803145-01
this device. FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
Please observe additionally the following in-
formation
– Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to
register their signal boosters by calling
their toll-free number.
– T-Mobile online registration link:
(www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra-
tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/
SignalBooster#).
– Verizon’s online registration link:
(http://www.verizonwireless.com/
wcms/consumer/register-signal-boos-
ter.html).
– AT&T online registration link (https://
securec45.securewebsession.com/
attsignalbooster.com/).
– U.S.Cellular online registration link
(http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/
support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).
Before use you must register your booster
device with your wireless provider.
If you should be requested by the FCC to
cease operating your booster, you are not
allowed to insert your mobile phone in the
charging tray anymore unless the booster is
permanently deactivated by your local MINI
dealer.
You must not remove the booster from the
car nor use it with any other than the prein-
stalled coupling device or antenna. Any
modification of the existing antenna or cou-
pling device as well as the use of other an-
228
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options – Glove compartment on the front passen-
ger side.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Compartments in the doors.
specific and optional features offered with – Storage compartment in the center arm-
the series. It also describes features and rest.
functions that are not necessarily available – Storage compartment in front of the cup
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- holders.
– Clothes hooks
When using these functions and systems, – Storage compartments in the cargo area.
the applicable laws and regulations must be – Storage tray in the center console.
observed. – Pockets on the backrests of the front
seats.
Safety information
Glove compartment
Warning Safety information
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown about the car's in- Warning
terior while driving, for instance in the Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
event of an accident, braking or evasive trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure glove compartment can be thrown into the
loose objects or devices with a cable con- car's interior while driving, for instance in
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior. the event of an accident, braking or eva-
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury.
Always close the glove compartment im-
NOTICE mediately after using it.
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of
damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Overview
The following storage compartments are
available in the car's interior:
229
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Opening Center armrest

General information
The center armrest contains a storage com-
partment.
Opening
Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment
switches on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-
rest upward, arrow 2.
Compartments in the doors
Set the incline
General information The center armrest can be adjusted in sev-
There are storage compartments in the eral tilt settings.
doors.
Safety information Cup holders

Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an acci- Warning
dent or a braking or evasive maneuver. Unsuitable containers in the cup holders
Broken glass can be scattered in the car's may damage the cup holders or be thrown
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of about the car’s interior in the event of an
damage to property. Do not use any break- accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful
able objects while driving. Only stow braking. Spilled liquids can distract from
breakable objects in closed storage com- the traffic conditions and lead to an acci-
partments. dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup
holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable
230
Storage compartments CONTROLS
containers. Do not transport hot bever- Safety information

ages.
NOTICE
Front With an open cup holder, the center arm-
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a
potential damage. Press back the covers
before the center armrest is folded up.
Clothes hooks
General information
In the center console.
The clothes hooks are located above the
rear doors.
Rear
Safety information
General information
The cup holder is located in the center arm- Warning
rest.
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of accident. When suspending cloth-
ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure
that they will not obstruct the driver's
view.
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. to a risk of objects flying about during
To open: press the button. braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
To close: push both covers back in, one after risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
the other. erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-
stance clothing articles, from the clothes
hooks.
231
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
the series. It also describes features and Warning
functions that are not necessarily available Improperly stowed objects can shift and
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- be thrown into the car's interior, for in-
tions or country versions. This also applies stance in the event of an accident or dur-
to safety-related functions and systems. ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi-
When using these functions and systems, cle occupants can be hit and injured. There
the applicable laws and regulations must be is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects
observed. and cargo properly.
Loading NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
Safety information There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure
that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Warning
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sud- Steps for Determining Correct Load
den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving Limit
characteristics may be negatively im-
1. Locate the statement “The combined
pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-
weight of occupants and cargo should
ing the braking distances and changing
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
the steering response. There is a risk of
your vehicle’s placard.
accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed 2. Determine the combined weight of the
the permitted gross weight. driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
Warning driver and passengers from XXX kg or
Loose objects or devices with a cable con- XXX lbs
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile 4. The resulting figure equals the available
phones, can be thrown about the car's in- amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
terior while driving, for instance in the pacity. For example, if the “XXX”
event of an accident, braking or evasive amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo and
232
Cargo area CONTROLS
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - – Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) the backrests.
5. Determine the combined weight of lug-
gage and cargo being loaded on the ve-
hicle. That weight may not safely exceed Lashing eyes in the cargo area
the available cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the availa-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Load
With storage compartment package: to se-
cure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in
the cargo area.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or
cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo
area.
Cargo cover
The maximum load is the sum of the weight
of the occupants and the cargo. General information
The greater the weight of the occupants, When the tailgate is opened, the cargo
the less cargo that can be transported. cover is raised.
Stowing and securing cargo Safety information

– Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
Warning
– Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
sible, directly behind and at the bottom
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
of the rear passenger seat backrests.
phones, can be thrown about the car's in-
– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is terior while driving, for instance in the
not occupied, secure each of the outer event of an accident, braking or evasive
safety belts in the opposite buckle. maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure
– If necessary, fold down the rear back- loose objects or devices with a cable con-
rests to stow large cargo. nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
233
CONTROLS Cargo area
Removing bags, from the multifunction hooks. Only

For storing bulky objects the cargo cover transport heavy luggage in the cargo area
can be removed. if it has been appropriately secured.
1. Detach the left and right retaining

straps at the tailgate.
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets
on the left and right.
There are two multifunction hooks in the

cargo area.
Enlarging the cargo area

Installing
1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon- Concept
tally into the two side brackets until it
audibly engages. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
2. Attach the left and right retaining straps
at the tailgate. – The rear seat backrests can be folded
down.
– The rear seat backrests can be moved
Storage compartments in the into an upright loading position using
the cargo setting.
cargo area
General information
Storage compartment on the side The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio
A storage compartment is located on the left of 40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests
side. and the center section can be folded down
separately.
Multifunction hook The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the rear.
Warning
Improper use of the multifunction hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about
during braking and evasive maneuvers,
for example. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, such as shopping
234
Cargo area CONTROLS
Safety information If possible, adjust the height of the head

restraints or remove them.
Warning
Danger of jamming with folding down the Warning
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the Body parts can be jammed when moving
area of movement of the rear backrest and the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
the of the head restraint is clear prior to Make sure that the area of movement is
folding down. clear when moving the head restraint.
Folding down the rear seat

Warning backrest from the rear
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an ac-
cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the rear seat backrest is locked after fold-
ing it back.
Warning
Pull the strap. The rear seat backrest folds
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
forward.
backrest while driving may occur due to
unintentional unlocking of the rear seat
backrests by the straps. There is a risk of Cargo position
injury. Only use straps for releasing the
rear seat backrests. Do not attach objects Concept
on the straps.
The rear seat backrests can be moved into
an upright loading position individually. An
adjustment in several tilt stages is possible
Warning as needed.
The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
seat setting or improper installation of the
child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
235
CONTROLS Cargo area
Adjusting 1. Pull the strap.

1. Pull the strap.
2. Fold the rear seat backrest rearward.

2. Set the loading position of the rear seat The rear seat backrest first engages in
backrest as required. the loading position.
3. Engage the rear seat backrest. 3. Pull the strap again.
4. Return the rear seat backrest to the up-
Folding back the backrest right seat position and engage it.
Without a cargo position:
1. Pull the strap. Variable cargo area floor
Concept
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo
area can be configured corresponding to
transport requirements.
General information
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer
2. Return the rear seat backrest to the up- to page 232.
right seat position and engage it.
With a cargo position:
236
Cargo area CONTROLS
Removing the cargo floor panel Folded up position

1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer
to page 234. Safety information
2. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor
panel upward. Warning
Improper use of the variable cargo floor
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying
about during braking and evasive maneu-
vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property.
– Do not use the variable cargo floor
panel to separate the cargo area and
vehicle interior in the sense of a par-
tition net.
3. Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear – Only use the variable cargo floor
and fold up above the locking point of panel in the folded-up position when
the upper position, refer to page 237. the backrests are folded up and
locked.
4. Pull the cargo floor panel backward from
the brackets. – Fold down the variable cargo floor
panel before driving off.
Inserting the cargo floor panel – Always secure cargo against shifting,
using straps, belts and lashing eyes,
1. Push the cargo area floor into the sup-
for instance.
ports at a shallow angle. The cargo area
floor must engage noticeably.
Fold up the cargo floor panel
Fold the rear part of the cargo floor panel
upward.
2. Fold the cargo area floor over down-

ward.
Fold up the cargo floor panel. You've

reached the maximum cargo height.
237
CONTROLS Cargo area
MINI Picnic Bench Mounting

1. Fold the rear part of the cargo floor
Concept panel upward.
The MINI Picnic Bench provides a comfort-
able seating surface on the loading lip of the
vehicle.
General information
Only use the MINI Picnic Bench while the
vehicle is parked and with the tailgate open.
When the MINI Picnic Bench is not in use,
fold it together to prevent soiling and dam-
age. 2. Place the MINI Picnic Bench on the
In vehicles with a no-touch opening and front part of the cargo floor panel and at-
closing tailgate: tach it to the rear part of the cargo floor
panel using the four snaps.
If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the
tailgate may open or close inadvertently if
you unintentionally move your foot or if a
foot movement is detected.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the
vehicle.
Safety information
3. Fold down the MINI Picnic Bench to-
Warning
ward the rear. The MINI Picnic Bench is
Body parts can be jammed when operating fastened with magnets.
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
Overview
The MINI Picnic Bench is located on the un-
derside of the cargo area floor.
4. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor

downward.
To disassemble the MINI Picnic Bench, pro-
ceed in reverse order.
238
Cargo area CONTROLS
Folding down The MINI Picnic Bench swings against the

underside of the cargo area floor and is fas-
1. Lift the rear part of the cargo area floor.
tened there with magnets.
2. Grasp the MINI Picnic Bench in the mid-

dle and pull it back and up against the
force of the magnets.
3. Fold the rear part of the cargo area floor

downward and place the MINI Picnic
Bench over the loading lip of the cargo
area. Place a protective cloth over the
bumper.
Folding up
Fold rear part of the cargo floor panel up-
ward.
239
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
specific and optional features offered with Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
the series. It also describes features and Do not exceed the maximum engine and
functions that are not necessarily available road speed:
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- – For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
tions or country versions. This also applies 100 mph/160 km/h.
When using these functions and systems, Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-
the applicable laws and regulations must be cumstances.
observed.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually
Breaking-in period be increased.
General information Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
Moving parts need to begin working to-
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
gether smoothly.
new; they achieve their full traction poten-
The following instructions will help you to tial after a break-in time.
achieve a long vehicle life and good effi-
Drive conservatively for the first
ciency.
200 miles/300 km.
During break-in, do not use the Launch
Control, refer to page 128. Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their
Safety information full effectiveness after ap-
prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately
Warning during this break-in period.
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react Clutch
with a delay. There is a risk of accident. The function of the clutch reaches its opti-
After installing new parts or with a new mal level only after a distance driven of ap-
vehicle, drive conservatively and inter- prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-
vene early if necessary. Observe the break- in period, engage the clutch gently.
in procedures of the respective parts and
components. Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob-
served if any of the components mentioned
240
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
above have to be renewed in the course of

the vehicle's operating life. Warning
If combustible materials, such as leaves or
grass, come in contact with hot parts of
General driving notes the exhaust gas system, these materials
can ignite. There is a risk of fire and inju-
Closing the tailgate ries. Do not remove the heat shields instal-
led and never apply undercoating to them.
Safety information Make sure that no combustible materials
can come in contact with hot vehicle parts
in driving operation, idle or during park-
Warning ing.
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-
cle and can endanger occupants and other
traffic participants or damage the vehicle Mobile communication devices in
in the event of an accident, braking or eva- the vehicle
sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust
fumes may enter the vehicle interior. Warning
to property. Do not drive with the tailgate Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can
open. influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mo-
bile phones. There is a risk of injury or
Driving with the tailgate open risk of damage to property. If possible, in
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be the car's interior use only mobile phones
avoided: with direct connections to an exterior an-
tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-
– Close all windows and the glass sunroof. ence and deflect the radiation from the
– Greatly increase the air flow from the car's interior.
vents.
– Drive moderately.
Hydroplaning
Hot exhaust gas system On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water
can form between the tires and road sur-
face.
Warning
This phenomenon is referred to as hydro-
High temperatures can occur underneath planing. It is characterized by a partial or
the body, for instance caused by the ex- complete loss of contact between the tires
haust gas system, while driving. Contact and the road surface, ultimately undermin-
with the exhaust gas system can cause ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi-
burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not cle.
touch the hot exhaust gas system, includ-
ing the exhaust pipe.
241
Driving through water Objects in the area around the pedals
General information Warning

When driving through water, follow the fol- Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
lowing: the pedal distance or block a depressed
– Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function. pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
– Drive through calm water only. jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
cured and cannot enter into the driver's
– Drive through water only if it is not
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm.
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
– Drive through water no faster than to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. and do not layer several floor mats. Make
sure that there is sufficient clearance for
Safety information the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
securely fastened again after they were re-
NOTICE moved, for instance for cleaning.
When driving too quickly through too
deep water, water can enter into the en- Driving in wet conditions
gine compartment, the electrical system or
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy
the transmission. There is a risk of damage
rain, gently press the brake pedal every few
miles.
age. When driving through water, do not
exceed the maximum indicated water level Ensure that this action does not endanger
and the maximum speed for driving other traffic.
through water. The heat generated during braking dries
brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
Braking safely In this way braking efficiency will be avail-
able when you need it.
General information
The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Hills
Braking System ABS as a standard feature.
Perform an emergency stop in situations General information
that require such. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in
Steering is still responsive. You can still the gear that requires least braking effort.
avoid any obstacles with a minimum of Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re-
steering effort. duce brake efficiency.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds You can increase the engine's braking effect
from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the by shifting down, going all the way to first
Antilock Braking System ABS is in its active gear, if needed.
mode.
242
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Safety information Ground clearance
Warning NOTICE
Light but consistent brake pressure can If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing curbs or underground garage entrances,
out and possibly even brake failure. There contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler,
is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces- and the underbody may occur. There is a
sive stress on the brake system. risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Ensure that there is suf-
ficient ground clearance available.
Warning
In idle state or with the engine switched
off, safety functions, for instance engine
braking effect, braking assistance and Roof-mounted luggage rack
steering assistance, may not be available.
There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt General information
to drive in idle state or with the engine Installation only possible with roof rack.
switched off.
Roof racks are available as special accesso-
ries.
Brake disc corrosion
Corrosion on the brake discs and contami- Mounting
nation on the brake pads are increased by Follow the installation instructions of the
the following circumstances: roof rack.
– Low mileage.
– Extended periods when the vehicle is
Loading
not used at all. Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise
– Infrequent use of the brakes. the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,
they have a major effect on vehicle handling
– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning and steering response.
agents.
Therefore, note the following when loading
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will and driving:
cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in
their response - generally this cannot be – Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
corrected. loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
Condensation water under the – Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for tilting and opening the glass
parked vehicle sunroof.
When using the automatic climate control,
– Distribute the roof load uniformly.
condensation water develops and collects
underneath the vehicle. – The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
243
– Always place the heaviest pieces on the – When driving on steep uphill or down-
bottom. hill grades: add engine oil and coolant
– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in- up to near the MAX mark.
stance using ratchet straps. – Avoid that the chassis bottom coming in
– Do not let objects project into the open- contact with the ground. The ground
ing path of the tailgate. clearance may vary depending on the
vehicle load.
– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-
celeration and braking maneuvers. Take – When wheels continue to spin, depress
corners gently. the accelerator so that driving stability
control systems can distribute the driv-
ing force to the wheels. Activate DTC
Dynamic Traction Control if available.
Driving on poor roads
After a trip on poor roads
Concept Note the following to maintain driving
Because of its greater ground clearance, the safety:
vehicle can be driven on a variety of road
– Clear heavy soiling from the body.
types and qualities.
– Keep the wheels and tires free of mud,
All-wheel drive can help improve drive
snow, ice, etc., and check them for dam-
power.
age.
Safety information
Driving on racetracks
NOTICE
Objects in unpaved areas, for instance
stones or branches, can damage the vehi- Warning
cle. There is a risk of damage to property, The vehicle is not designed for use in M
among other potential damage. Do not Sport or motor sport type competition.
drive on unpaved terrain. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the
vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type
competitions.
When driving on poor roads
For your own safety, for the safety of pas- Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
sengers and of the vehicle, heed the follow- racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
ing points: Use of the vehicle in M sport or motor sport
– Familiarize yourself with the vehicle be- type competition is an improper use of the
fore driving. vehicle and may affect your warranty cover-
– Do not take risks when driving. age. See “New Vehicle Limited Warranty”
for more details.
– Adjust the speed to the road surface
conditions. The steeper and more un-
even the road surface, the slower the
speed.
244
Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS
Reducing fuel consumption

Vehicle features and options Attached parts on the vehicle impair the
aerodynamics and increase the fuel con-
sumption.
functions that are not necessarily available Close the windows and glass
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sunroof
to safety-related functions and systems. Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
When using these functions and systems, open results in increased air resistance and
the applicable laws and regulations must be raises fuel consumption.
observed.
Tires
General information
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of consumption and emis- Tires can affect consumption in various
sion values. ways, for instance tire size may influence
consumption.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of
different factors.
Check the tire inflation pressure
The implementation of certain measures,
driving style and regular maintenance can
regularly
influence fuel consumption and environ- Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla-
mental impact. tion pressure at least twice a month and be-
fore starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling
Remove unnecessary cargo resistance and thus raises fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Additional weight increases fuel consump-
tion.
Drive away without delay
Remove attached parts follow- Do not wait for the engine to warm-up
while the vehicle remains stationary. Start
ing use driving right away, but at moderate engine
speeds.
Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof-mounted or
This is the fastest way for the cold engine
rear carriers which are no longer required
to reach its operating temperature.
following use.
245
DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption
Look well ahead when driving If the engine is switched off and then re-
started rather than leaving the engine run-
ning constantly, fuel consumption and emis-
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces sions are reduced. Savings can begin within
fuel consumption. a few seconds of switching off the engine.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak- In addition, fuel consumption is also deter-
ing. mined by other factors, such as driving
By maintaining a suitable distance to the style, road conditions, maintenance or envi-
vehicle driving ahead of you. ronmental factors.
Avoid high engine speeds Switch off any functions that

are not currently needed
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel
consumption and reduces wear.
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift window defroster require a lot of energy
indicator, refer to page 139. and consume additional fuel, especially in
city and stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
Use coasting conditions needed.
When approaching a red light, take your

foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle Have maintenance carried out
coast to a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the ac- Have the vehicle maintained regularly to
celerator and let the vehicle roll. achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-
The fuel supply is interrupted while coast- ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-
ing. nance work be performed by a MINI service
center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems,
Switch off the engine during refer to page 285.
longer stops
GREEN Mode
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops,
for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-
Concept
ings or in traffic jam. GREEN Mode supports a driving style that
saves on consumption. For this purpose, the
Auto Start/Stop function engine control and comfort features, for in-
stance the climate control output, are ad-
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle justed.
automatically switches off the engine dur-
ing a stop. For Steptronic transmission:
246
Under certain conditions the engine is auto- Via the Central Information Display
matically decoupled from the transmission (CID)
in the D selector lever position. The vehicle
1. "My MINI"
continues traveling with the engine idling
to reduce consumption. The D selector lever 2. "Vehicle settings"
position remains engaged. 3. "Configure GREEN"
In addition, context-sensitive instructions 4. Select the desired setting.
are displayed to assist with an efficient
driving style. Activating/deactivating the functions
The achieved extended range is displayed in The following functions can be activated/
the instrument cluster as bonus range. deactivated:
General information – "GREEN speed warning"
– "GREEN climate control"
The system includes the following MINI-
MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis- – "Coasting"
plays: Settings are stored for the driver profile
– GREEN Limit, refer to page 247 currently used.
– GREEN climate control, refer to
page 247. GREEN Limit
– GREEN bonus range, refer to page 248. – "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit
is activated.
– GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 248. A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of
the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
– Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 249. – "Tip at:"
– MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to Set the desired speed for the GREEN
page 251. Limit.
Activating GREEN Mode GREEN climate control

Climate control is set to be efficient.
Press the MINI Driving Modes
switch downward until By making a slight change to the set tem-
GREEN is displayed in the in- perature and adjusting the rate of heating
strument cluster. or cooling of the car's interior consumption
can be economized.
The power output to the seat heater and ex-
Configuring GREEN terior mirror is reduced.
Via MINI Driving Modes switch Coasting

1. Activating GREEN Mode. Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging
the engine and coasting, refer to page 249,
2. "Configure GREEN" with the engine idling.
3. Select the desired setting. This function is only available in GREEN
drive mode.
247
Deactivate the function to use the braking – Mark outside the green range: modify
effect of the engine when traveling down- driving style, for example by backing off
hill. the accelerator.
GREEN potential savings GREEN tip, driving instruction

Shows potential savings with the current
settings in percentages. General information
The GREEN tip indicates that your driving
Display in the instrument cluster style can be modified to be more efficient,
for example by backing off the accelerator.
GREEN bonus range
A modified driving style helps Instrument cluster without enhanced
you extend your driving dis- features: display
tance.
The range extension can be
displayed as the bonus range
The bonus range is shown in the range dis-
play.
The bonus range is automatically reset ev-
ery time the vehicle is refueled.
– Green display: efficient driving style.
– Gray display: modify driving style, for Instrument cluster with enhanced
instance by backing off the accelerator features: display
pedal.
Efficiency display
A bar display in the instru-
ment cluster indicates your
current driving efficiency.
Mark in the left area, arrow 1:
display for energy recovered
by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display Activating/deactivating the display
when accelerating.
Activate information relating to the driving
The efficiency of your driving style is style and GREEN tips in the instrument
shown by the position of the mark: cluster using the Central Information Dis-
– Mark inside the green range: efficient play (CID):
driving style.
1. "My MINI"
248
3. "Displays" – Coasting.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer
5. "GREEN info"
GREEN tip, symbols 1. "My MINI"
An additional icon and text instructions are 2. "Technology in action"
displayed.
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Icon Measure Further information on the MINIMALISM
For an efficient driving style, look analyzer, refer to page 251.
well ahead when driving, acceler-
ate conservatively, and delay ac- Coasting
celerating.
Reduce speed to the selected
Concept
GREEN speed. The function helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the en-
Steptronic transmission: gine is automatically decoupled from the
Switch from M/S to D and avoid transmission when selector lever position D
manual shift interventions. is set. The vehicle continues traveling with
the engine idling to reduce consumption.
Manual transmission: Selector lever position D remains engaged.
Follow the shift instructions. This driving condition is referred to as
coasting.
Manual transmission:
As soon as you step on the brake or acceler-
Engage neutral for an engine stop.
ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou-
pled again.
Indications on the Control Display
General information
Displaying MINIMALISM information Coasting is a component of the GREEN
The current efficiency of the functions in drive mode.
GREEN drive mode can be displayed on the Coasting is automatically activated when
Control Display. the GREEN drive mode is called via the
Via the Central Information Display (CID): MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to
page 184.
1. "My MINI"
A proactive driving style helps the driver to
2. "Technology in action" use the function often and supports the effi-
3. "MINIMALISM" cient effect of coasting.
Information is shown on the following func-
tions:
The function is available in the speed range
– Auto Start/Stop function.
from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to
– Energy recovery. 100 mph/160 km/h.
249
– Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are Instrument cluster with enhanced features
not operated.
– The selector lever is in selector lever po-
sition D.
– Engine and transmission are at operat-
ing temperature.
– With a camera in the area of the interior
mirror: the system does not detect any
vehicles ahead of you.
Operation via shift paddles The bar display below the tachometer is fil-
led in green and the mark appears at the
Concept zero point. The tachometer indicates idle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the speed.
coasting mode can be influenced with the
shift paddles. Indications on the Control Display
The coasting driving condition is displayed
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
in the MINIMALISM Info while driving.
paddles
The distance traveled in the coasting driv-
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the
ing condition is indicated by a counter.
right shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the Displaying MINIMALISM information
right shift paddle again. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
1. "My MINI"
Display 2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"
features
System limits
The function is not available if one of the
following conditions applies:
– DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
– Cruise control is activated.
– If driving in the dynamic limit range.
– If driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades.
– The battery charge state is temporarily
The bar display below the tachometer is fil- too low.
led in green and the mark appears at the – The vehicle electrical system is drawing
zero point. The tachometer indicates idle excessive current.
speed.
250
MINIMALISM analyzer fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number

of stars is displayed.
Concept The table of values contains stars and evalu-
The function helps develop an especially ef- ates the driving style in different catego-
ficient driving style and to conserve fuel. ries. The more efficient the driving style,
the more stars are displayed in the table.
For this purpose, the driving style is ana-
lyzed. The assessment is done in various The bonus range achieved by a driving style
categories and is displayed on the Control that minimizes consumption is displayed
Display. below the table of values. The more effi-
cient the driving style, the faster the bonus
This display will help you adjust your driv- range increases.
ing style and save some fuel.
To assist with an efficient driving style,
The range of the vehicle can be extended by GREEN tips are displayed while driving.
adopting an efficient driving style. This gain
in range is displayed as a bonus range in the Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Sav-
instrument cluster and on the Control Dis- ing fuel, refer to page 245.
play.
This function is available in GREEN drive
mode.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Display on the Control Display

The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer
consists of a fish in a water glass, a table of
values and the display of the achieved bo-
nus range.
The fish and the movements of the water in
the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the
driving style.
Depending on the equipment, the fish is
shown with efficient and inefficient driving
style or only with inefficient driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the less
the water sloshes around in the bowl and
the better is the fish's mood. If the driving
style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the
251
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options Fuel cap
This chapter describes all standard, country- Opening
1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the
rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap
opens.
observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
page 254, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving distance of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
damage to property, among other potential tached to the fuel filler flap.
damage. Refuel promptly.
252
Refueling MOBILITY
Closing Safety information
Warning NOTICE
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
jammed and crushed during closing. The of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-
cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm
or risk of damage to property. Pay atten- the environment. There is a risk of damage
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed to property, among other potential dam-
or crushed when closing the cap. age. Avoid overfilling.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en-
gages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to
unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in-
stance with an electrical fault.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s
Follow the following when re-

fueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle
completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the
fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:
– Premature switching off.
– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle
clicks off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-
erly after refueling, otherwise the emissions
warning light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
253
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options xx: comply with the current standard in
each case.
This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information
functions that are not necessarily available NOTICE
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
tions or country versions. This also applies wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel
to safety-related functions and systems. system and engine. Furthermore, the cata-
When using these functions and systems, lytic converter is permanently damaged.
the applicable laws and regulations must be There is a risk of damage to property,
observed. among other potential damage. Do not re-
fuel or add the following in the case of
gasoline engines:
Fuel recommendation – Leaded gasoline.
– Metallic additives, for instance man-
General information ganese or iron.
Depending on the region, many gas stations Do not press the Start/Stop button after
sell fuel that has been customized to winter refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a
or summer conditions. Fuel that is available dealer’s service center or another qualified
in winter, for instance helps make a cold service center or repair shop.
start easier.
Gasoline NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system
General information and the engine. There is a risk of damage
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline to property, among other potential dam-
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur age. Do not use fuels with a higher per-
content. centage of ethanol than recommended. Do
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as not refuel with fuels containing methanol,
containing metal must not be used. e.g. M5 to M100.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-
eling. NOTICE
Ethanol should meet the following quality Fuel that does not comply with the mini-
standards: mum quality can compromise engine func-
US: ASTM 4806–xx tion or cause engine damage. There is a
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx potential damage. Do not fill with fuel that
254
Fuel MOBILITY
does not comply with the minimum qual-

ity.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
tionally, problems relating to drivability,
starting and stalling, especially under cer-
tain environmental conditions such as
high ambient temperature and high alti-
tude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered,
we recommend switching to a high quality
gasoline brand and a higher octane grade
— AKI number — for a few tank fills. To
avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly
recommended to purchase gasoline from
Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
tions may result in the need for additional
maintenance.
Recommended fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 91.
John Cooper Works:
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the
rated performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade

John Cooper Works:
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI
Rating, the engine may produce knocking
sounds when starting at high external tem-
peratures. This has no effect on the engine
life.
255
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Tire pressure specifications
This chapter describes all standard, country- In the tire inflation pressure table
specific and optional features offered with The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
the series. It also describes features and page 257, contains all tire inflation pres-
functions that are not necessarily available sure specifications for the specified tire
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire
tions or country versions. This also applies inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes
to safety-related functions and systems. approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle
When using these functions and systems, for the vehicle type.
the applicable laws and regulations must be To identify the correct tire inflation pres-
observed. sure, please note the following:
– Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure – Maximum speed for driving.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation General information
pressure influence the following: Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla-
– The service life of the tires. tion pressure increases with the tire tem-
– Road safety. perature.
– Driving comfort. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire
inflation pressure.
– Fuel consumption.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
Safety information read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure

Warning specifications in the tire inflation
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure table
pressure may heat up significantly and The tire inflation pressure specifications in
sustain damage. This will have a negative the tire inflation pressure table only relate
impact on aspects of handling, such as to cold tires or tires at the same tempera-
steering and braking response. There is a ture as the ambient temperature.
risk of accident. Regularly check the tire
inflation pressure, and correct it as Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
needed, for instance twice a month and be- when the tires are cold, i.e.:
fore a long trip. – Driving distance of max.
1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.
– If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
256
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
1. Determine the intended tire inflation

pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-
ample.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the
actual tire inflation pressure deviates
from the intended tire inflation pres-
sure.
These pressure values can also be found on
4. Check whether all valve caps are the tire inflation pressure label on the driv-
screwed onto the tire valves. er's door pillar.
After correcting the tire inflation Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/
pressure 160 km/h.
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
Tire pressure values up to
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
100 mph/160 km/h
Checking the tire inflation pressure of COOPER, COOPER ALL4

the emergency wheel Tire size Pressure specifications
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the in bar/PSI
emergency wheel in the cargo area regu-
larly, and correct it as needed. Specifications
in bar/PSI with
cold tires
Tire pressures up to 100 mph/
160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and 225/55 R 17 97 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32
for optimum driving comfort, note the pres- H A/S
sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta- 225/55 R 17 97
ble, refer to page 257, and adjust as neces- W
sary. 225/55 R 17 97
H M+S
257
Tire size Pressure specifications COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4

in bar/PSI
Tire size Pressure specifications
225/50 R 18 95 2.3 / 33 2.3 / 33 in bar/PSI
V A/S
225/50 R 18 95 Specifications
W in bar/PSI with
cold tires
225/50 R 18 99
W XL
205/65 R 16 95 225/55 R 17 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
H M+S 97 H A/S
225/50 R 18 95 225/50 R 18
H M+S 95 V A/S
225/45 R 19 96 2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38 225/55 R 17
W XL 97 W
225/45 R 19 96 225/50 R 18
Y XL 95 W
205/60 R 17 93 225/55 R 17
H M+S 97 H M+S
205/55 R 18 96 225/50 R 18
H XL M+S 95 H M+S
Emergency Speed up to a max. of 225/45 R 19 2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38

wheel 50 mph / 80 km/h 96 W XL
T 115/95 R 17 4.2 / 60 225/45 R 19
95 M 96 Y XL
205/60 R 17
93 H M+S
205/55 R 18
96 H XL M+S
Emergency Speed up to a max. of
wheel 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 115/95 R 17 4.2 / 60
95 M
258
JOHN COOPER WORKS Tire pressure values over 100 mph/

160 km/h
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI COOPER, COOPER ALL4
Specifications
in bar/PSI with Tire size Pressure specifications
cold tires in bar/PSI
Specifications
in bar/PSI with
225/50 R 18 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
cold tires
95 V A/S
225/50 R 18
95 W 225/55 R 17 97 2.4 / 35 2.4 / 35
225/50 R 18 H A/S
95 H M+S 225/55 R 17 97
225/45 R 19 2.7 / 39 2.7 / 39 W
96 W XL 225/55 R 17 97
205/55 R 18 H M+S
96 H XL M+S 225/50 R 18 95 2.6 / 38 2.6 / 38
V A/S
Tire inflation pressures at max. 225/50 R 18 95
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h W
225/50 R 18 99
W XL
Warning
205/65 R 16 95
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex- H M+S
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob-
serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres- 225/50 R 18 95
sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/ H M+S
160 km/h from the relevant table on the 225/45 R 19 96 2.8 / 41 2.8 / 41
following pages. Otherwise, tire damage W XL
and accidents could occur.
225/45 R 19 96
Y XL
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure 205/60 R 17 93
values in the tire inflation pressure table, H M+S
refer to page 259, and adjust as necessary. 205/55 R 18 96
H XL M+S
wheel 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 115/95 R 17 4.2 / 60
95 M
259
COOPER S, COOPER S ALL4 JOHN COOPER WORKS
Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications

in bar/PSI in bar/PSI
Specifications Specifications
in bar/PSI with in bar/PSI with
cold tires cold tires
225/55 R 17 3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44 225/50 R 18 3.0 / 44 3.0 / 44

97 H A/S 95 V A/S
225/50 R 18 225/50 R 18
95 V A/S 95 W
225/55 R 17 225/50 R 18
97 W 95 H M+S
225/50 R 18 225/45 R 19 3.2 / 46 3.2 / 46
95 W 96 W XL
225/55 R 17 205/55 R 18
97 H M+S 96 H XL M+S
225/50 R 18
95 H M+S
225/45 R 19 3.2 / 46 3.2 / 46 Tire identification marks
96 W XL
225/45 R 19 Tire size
96 Y XL
205/45 R 17 84 V
205/60 R 17
205: nominal width in mm
93 H M+S
45: aspect ratio in %
205/55 R 18
96 H XL M+S R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches
wheel 50 mph / 80 km/h 84: load rating, not for ZR tires
T 115/95 R 17 4.2 / 60 V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
95 M
Maximum tire load
Maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire
sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
– GAWR – on the certification label on the
driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by
1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the
vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –
260
GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading
loads, respectively.
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread
Speed letter shoulder and maximum section width.
Designation Maximum speed E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera-
ture A
Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
R up to 106 mph/170 km/h DOT Quality Grades
Treadwear
S up to 112 mph/180 km/h
Traction AA A B C
T up to 118 mph/190 km/h Temperature A B C
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
V up to 150 mph/240 km/h Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
these grades.
W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Tire Identification Number based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0121 specified government test course. E.g., a
xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand tire graded 150 would wear one and one-
xxx: tire size and tire design half, 1 g, times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative
0121: tire age
performance of tires depends upon the ac-
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines tual conditions of their use, however, and
of the U.S. Department of Transportation. may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
Tire age tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at Traction
least every 6 years. The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Manufacture date Those grades represent the tire's ability to
You can find the manufacture date of the stop on wet pavement as measured under
tire on the tire's sidewall. controlled conditions on specified govern-
Designation Manufacture date ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction per-
DOT … 0121 1st week 2021 formance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
261
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Tire tread

characteristics.
Temperature Summer tires

The temperature grades are A, the highest, Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
B, and C, representing the tire's resistance 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in-
to the generation of heat and its ability to creased risk of hydroplaning.
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Winter tires
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
cause the material of the tire to degenerate 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera- for winter operation.
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perform- Minimum tread depth
ance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Warning
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated Wear indicators are distributed around the
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un- tire's circumference and have the legally re-
derinflation, or excessive loading, either quired minimum height of 0.063 in-
separately or in combination, can cause ches/1.6 mm.
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
RSC – Run-flat tires Wear Indicator.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 265, are labeled
with a circular icon containing the letters
RSC marked on the sidewall. Tire damage
M+S General information
Winter and all-season tires with better cold Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for-
weather performance than summer tires. eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread
wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-
ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-
cles can cause serious damage to wheels,
tires and suspension parts. This is more
262
likely to occur with low-profile tires, which damage. There is a danger of accidents and
provide less cushioning between the wheel property damage. If possible, avoid driving
and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz- over objects or road conditions that may
ards and reduce your speed, especially if damage tires, or drive over them slowly
your vehicle is equipped with low-profile and carefully.
tires.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle
malfunctions:
– Unusual vibrations.
Changing wheels and tires
– Unusual tire or running noises.
Mounting and wheel balancing
– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right. Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc-
ing carried out by a dealer’s service center
Damage can be caused by the following sit- or another qualified service center or repair
uations, for instance: shop.
– Driving over curbs.
– Road damage. Wheel and tire combination
– Tire inflation pressure too low.
– Vehicle overloading. General information
– Incorrect tire storage. You can ask the dealer's service center or
shop about the correct wheel/tire combina-
Safety information tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.

Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con- Warning
trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-
Wheels and tires which are not suitable
age is suspected while driving,
for your vehicle can damage parts of the
immediately reduce speed and stop. Have
vehicle, for instance due to contact with
wheels and tires checked. For this pur-
the body due to tolerances despite the
pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
same official size rating. There is a risk of
an accident. The manufacturer of your ve-
center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed
hicle strongly suggests that you use
or transported as needed. Do not repair
wheels and tires that have been recom-
damaged tires, but have them replaced.
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.
Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over
obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller
tire cross-section. The smaller the tire
cross-section, the higher the risk of tire
263
Retreaded tires
Warning
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will Warning
have a negative impact on the vehicle's
handling and on the function of a variety Retreaded tires can have different tire cas-
of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak- ing structures. With advanced age the
ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con- service life can be limited. There is a risk
trol. There is a risk of accident. To main- of an accident. The manufacturer of your
tain good handling and vehicle response, vehicle does not recommend the use of re-
use only tires with a single tread configu- treaded tires.
ration from a single manufacturer. The
manufacturer of the vehicle recommends The manufacturer of the vehicle does not
that you use wheels and tires that have recommend the use of retreaded tires.
been recommended by the vehicle manu-
facturer for your vehicle type. Following Winter tires
tire damage, have the original wheel/tire Winter tires are recommended for operat-
combination remounted on the vehicle as ing on winter roads.
soon as possible. Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro-
vide better winter traction than summer
tires, they usually do not provide the same
Recommended tire brands level of performance as winter tires.
Maximum speed of winter tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is
higher than the permissible speed for the
winter tires, then attach a label showing the
permissible maximum speed in the field of
view. The label is available from a dealer's
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the With winter tires mounted, observe and do
vehicle recommends certain tire brands. not exceed the permissible maximum speed.
The tire brands can be identified by a star
on the tire sidewall. Changing runflat tires
When changing from run-flat tires to stand-
New tires ard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac- contains a compact spare tire ("donut") or
turing circumstances when tires are brand- tire mobility kit. Further information is
new; they achieve their full traction poten- available from a dealer's service center or
tial after a break-in time. another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
264
Rotating wheels between axles Safety information

Different wear patterns can occur on the
front and rear axles depending on individual Warning
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated
The vehicle handles differently when a
in pairs between the axles to achieve even
run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire
wear. Further information is available from
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-
a dealer's service center or another qualified
ity when braking, braking distances are
service center or repair shop. After rotating,
longer and the self-steering properties will
check the tire pressure and correct, if
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
needed.
moderately and do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
Storing tires
Tire inflation pressure Label
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure indicated on the side wall of the
tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
dark place.
Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags. The tires are marked on the tire sidewall
Remove dirt from wheels or tires. with RSC Run-flat System Component.
Run-flat tires Repairing a flat tire

Concept Safety measures
Run-flat tires permit continued driving un- – Park the vehicle as far away as possible
der restricted conditions even in the event from passing traffic and on solid ground.
of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
General information – Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
The wheels are composed of tires that are
self-supporting to a limited degree. – Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
The support of the sidewall allows the tire tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
to remain drivable to a restricted degree in
the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. – Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
Follow the instructions for continued driv-
ing with a flat tire.
265
side the immediate area in a safe place, Overview

such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle Storage
at an appropriate distance. The Mobility System is located in a bag on
the right side trim in the cargo area.
Mobility System Sealant container
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire dam-
age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-
tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is
pumped into the tires, which seals the dam-
age from the inside.
General information
– Follow the instructions on using the – Sealant container, arrow 1.
Mobility System found on the compres- – Filling hose, arrow 2.
sor and sealant container.
Observe use-by date on the sealant con-
– Use of the Mobility System may be inef- tainer.
fective if the tire puncture measures ap-
prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
Compressor
– Contact a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
– Do not remove foreign bodies that have
penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire.
– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-
ant container and apply it to the steer-
ing wheel.
– The use of a sealant can damage the 1 Sealant container unlocking
TPM wheel electronics. In this case, 2 Sealant container holder
have the TPM wheel electronics re- 3 Tire pressure gage
placed at the next opportunity.
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
– The compressor can be used to check
5 On/off switch
the tire inflation pressure.
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
266
Safety measures Filling

– Park the vehicle as far away as possible 1. Shake the sealant container.
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place, 2. Pull filling hose completely out of the
such as behind a guardrail. cover of the sealant container. Do not
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle kink the hose.
at an appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant

Safety information
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust 3. Slide the sealant container into the
gases contain pollutants which are color- holder on the compressor housing, en-
less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex- suring that it engages audibly.
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
NOTICE
The compressor can overheat during ex-
tended operation. There is a risk of dam-
age to property, among other potential
damage. Do not run the compressor for
more than 10 minutes.
267
4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con- Checking and adjusting the tire
tainer onto the tire valve of the non- inflation pressure
working wheel.
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the
tire pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-
sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant

container
5. With the compressor switched off, in-
sert the connector into the power socket 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant
in the vehicle interior. container from the tire valve.
2. Press the red unlocking device.
3. Remove the sealant container from the
compressor.
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in
suitable material to avoid dirtying the
cargo area.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not

reached
6. With the ignition switched on or the en- 1. Pull the connector out of the power
gine running, switch on the compressor. socket in the vehicle interior.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
3. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes

to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant,
the tire inflation pressure may sporadically
reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the
compressor at this point.
268
4. Insert the connector into the power Adjustment

socket in the vehicle interior. 1. Stop at a suitable location.
2. Screw the connection hose of the com-
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
5. With the ignition switched on or the en-

gine running, switch on the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least 3. Insert the connector into the power
2 bar cannot be reached, contact your socket in the vehicle interior.
dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
If a tire inflation pressure of at least
2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-
tion pressure is reached.
6. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
7. Pull the connector out of the power
socket in the vehicle interior.
8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at
least 2.0 bar.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is – Increase tire inflation pressure: with
reached the ignition switched on or the en-
1. Unscrew the connection hose of the gine running, switch on the com-
compressor from the tire valve. pressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the power – Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
socket in the vehicle interior. the button on the compressor.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle. 5. Unscrew the connection hose of the
4. Immediately drive approx. compressor from the tire valve.
5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant 6. Pull the connector out of the power
is evenly distributed in the tire. socket in the vehicle interior.
Do not exceed a speed of 7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less Continuing the trip
than 12 mph/20 km/h. Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
269
Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

page 167. Warning
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Insufficiently tight tire chains may dam-
page 162. age tires and vehicle components. There
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant may be a risk of accident or risk of damage
container of the Mobility System promptly. to property. Make sure that the tire chains
are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as
needed according to the tire chain manu-
Tire chains facturer's instructions.
General information Fine-link tire chains

The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter- The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mined certain wheels and tires to be suita- mends the use of fine-link tire chains. Cer-
ble for operation on the vehicle. tain types of fine-link tire chains have been
Follow the tire chain manufacturer's in- tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle
structions. and recommended as road-safe and suitable.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after Information regarding suitable tire chains is
mounting tire chains, as doing so may result available from a dealer’s service center or
in incorrect readings. another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
after mounting tire chains, as doing so may
result in incorrect readings. Use
When driving with tire chains, briefly acti- Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip-
vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if ped with the tires of the following size:
needed. – 205/65 R 16.
– 205/60 R 17.
Safety information – 205/55 R 18.
John Cooper Works:
Warning – 205/60 R 17.
With the mounting of tire chains on un- – 205/55 R 18.
suitable tires, the tire chains can come
into contact with vehicle parts. There may
be a risk of accident or risk of damage to
Maximum speed with tire chains
property. Only mount tire chains on tires Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h
that are designated by their manufacturer when using tire chains.
as suitable for the use of tire chains.
Changing wheels/tires
General information
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
wheel does not always need to be changed
270
immediately when there is a loss of tire in-

flation pressure due to a flat tire. Warning
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex-
available as accessories from a dealer’s ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
service center or another qualified service can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If
center or repair shop. possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid,
and slip-resistant surface.
Safety information
DANGER Warning
The vehicle jack is only provided for short- The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
term lifting of the vehicle for wheel the vehicle and for the jacking points on
changes. Even if all safety measures are the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.
observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi- Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using
cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. the vehicle jack.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
vehicle and do not start the engine. Warning
When the vehicle jack is not inserted into
the jacking point provided for this pur-
DANGER pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the
Supports such as wooden blocks under the vehicle jack may slip when it is being
vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve- cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk
hicle jack to bear weight. They have the of damage to property. When cranking up
potential to exert too much strain on the the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted
vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the in the jacking point next to the wheel
vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or housing.
danger to life. Do not place supports under
the vehicle jack.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
Warning may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac- exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and
turer, is provided in order to perform a risk of damage to property. While the ve-
wheel change in the event of a breakdown. hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces
The jack is not designed for frequent use; on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi-
for example, changing from summer to cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal-
winter tires. Using the jack frequently may er’s service center or another qualified
cause it to become jammed or damaged. service center or repair shop.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage
to property. Only use the jack to attach an
emergency or spare wheel in the event of
a breakdown.
271
Securing the vehicle against rolling – Set the parking brake.

– Engage a gear or move the selector lever
General information to position P.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to – As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
additionally secure the vehicle against roll- have all vehicle occupants get out of the
ing away when changing a wheel. vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
On a level surface such as behind a guardrail.
– Depending on the vehicle equipment,
get wheel change tools and, if necessary,
the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
or portable hazard warning light at an
appropriate distance.
– Secure the vehicle additionally against
rolling.
– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects
in front and behind the wheel that is diago- Jacking points for the vehicle jack
nal to the wheel to be changed.
On a slight downhill gradient
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are

located at the marked positions.
If you need to change a wheel on a slight Jacking up the vehicle

downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
able objects, for instance rocks, under the
wheels of both the front and rear axles Warning
against the rolling direction. Hands and fingers can be jammed when
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of
injury. Comply with the described hand
Preparing the vehicle position and do not change this position
– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip while using the vehicle jack.
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
272
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar- 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank stands vertically and at a right angle be-
or lever with your other hand, arrow 2. neath the jacking point.
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan- 6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot
gular recess of the jacking point closest stands vertically and perpendicularly be-
to the wheel to be changed. neath the jacking point after extending
the vehicle jack.
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the

vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise. 7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle
jack is with the entire surface on the
ground and the relevant wheel is maxi-
mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as re-
quired.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel
jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under
on and screw in at least two lug bolts in
load and continue turning the vehicle
a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
jack crank or lever with one hand.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the
accompanying lug bolts may have to be
used as well.
273
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts Also check the tire inflation pressure of the
and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross- emergency wheel in the cargo area regu-
wise pattern. larly, and correct it as needed.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-
clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and Safety information
lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se- Warning
curely. The emergency wheel has particular di-
mensions. When driving with an emer-
After the wheel change gency wheel, changed driving properties
1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The may occur, for instance reduced lane sta-
tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm. bility when braking, longer braking dis-
tance, and changed self-steering proper-
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
ties in the limit area. There is a risk of
area, if necessary.
accident. Drive moderately and do not ex-
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
under the cargo floor panel because of
its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next Overview
opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are
tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
shop.
The emergency wheel and the wheel change
tools are located in the cargo area under the
cargo floor panel.
Emergency wheel
Concept Removing the emergency wheel
In the event of a flat tire, the emergency 1. Pull up and remove the cargo floor
wheel can be used in place of the wheel panel.
with the defective tire. The emergency 2. Unscrew the butterfly screw.
wheel is only intended for temporary use 3. Remove the retaining plate or the cover.
until the defective tire/wheel has been re-
placed. 4. Where applicable, remove the holder
and the trailer hitch.
General information
Mount one emergency wheel only.
274
5. Remove the jacking point and the tool

holder on the left next to the emergency
wheel.
6. Slide the emergency wheel to the left
and remove it.
Inserting the emergency wheel

1. Insert the emergency wheel on the left
and slide it to the right.
2. Where applicable, mount the holder and
the trailer hitch.
3. Attach the retaining plate or the cover.
4. Screw on and tighten the butterfly
screw.
5. Insert and secure the jacking point and
the tool holder on the left next to the
emergency wheel.
6. Insert the cargo floor panel.
275
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir
276
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Hood
Warning
Safety information Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
Warning of the hood is clear during opening and
Improperly executed work in the engine closing.
compartment can damage vehicle compo-
nents and impair vehicle functions. There
is a risk of an accident and damage to NOTICE
property. Have work in the engine com- Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
partment performed by a dealer’s service the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
center or another qualified service center age to property, among other potential
or repair shop. damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
Warning hood.
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components
in the engine compartment can also move NOTICE
with the vehicle switched off, for instance When the hood is closed, it must engage
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. on both sides. Pressing again can damage
Do not reach into the area of moving parts. the hood. There is a risk of damage to
Keep articles of clothing and hair away property, among other potential damage.
from moving parts. Open the hood again and then close it en-
ergetically. Avoid pressing again.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance Opening the hood
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
There is a risk of injury. If the hood is Hood is unlocked.
open, pay attention to protruding parts
and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-
rectly close the hood.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
277
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
278
Engine oil MOBILITY
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Safety information
specific and optional features offered with NOTICE
the series. It also describes features and An engine oil level that is too low causes
functions that are not necessarily available engine damage. There is a risk of damage
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- to property, among other potential dam-
tions or country versions. This also applies age. Immediately add engine oil.
observed. NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the en-
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a
General information risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Do not add too much en-
gine oil. When too much engine oil is
The engine oil consumption is dependent on added, have the engine oil level corrected
your driving style and driving conditions. by a dealer’s service center or another
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil qualified service center or repair shop.
level after refueling by taking a detailed
measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for instance: Electronic oil measurement
– Sporty driving style.
– Break-in of the engine. General information
– Idling of the engine. The electronic oil measurement has two
– With use of engine oil types that are measuring principles:
classified as not suitable. – Monitoring.
Different Check Control messages appear, – Detailed measurement.
depending on the engine oil level. When making frequent short-distance trips
or using a dynamic driving style, for in-
stance when taking curves aggressively,
regularly perform a detailed measurement.
279
MOBILITY Engine oil
Monitoring General information

During the measurement, the idle speed is
Concept increased somewhat.
The engine oil level is monitored electroni-
cally while driving and can be shown on the Functional requirements
Control Display. – Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
If the engine oil level is outside its permis- tion.
sible operating range, a Check Control mes- – Manual transmission: shift lever in neu-
sage is displayed. tral position, clutch and accelerator ped-
A red indicator light indicates that als not depressed.
the engine oil pressure is too low. – Steptronic transmission: selector lever
in selector lever position N or P and ac-
celerator pedal not depressed.
Functional requirements – Engine is running and is at operating
A current measured value is available after temperature.
approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Performing a detailed measurement
Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
2. "Vehicle status"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
5. "Start measurement"
System limits The engine oil level is checked and dis-
played via a scale.
When making frequent short-distance trips
or using a dynamic driving style, it may not
be possible to calculate a measured value.
In this case, the measured value for the last, Adding engine oil
sufficiently long trip is displayed.
General information
Detailed measurement Only add engine oil when the message is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The
Concept quantity to be added is indicated in the
The engine oil level is checked when the ve- message displayed in the instrument clus-
hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. ter.
If the engine oil level is outside its permis- Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer
sible operating range, a Check Control mes- to page 282.
sage is displayed. Safely park the vehicle and switch off the
ignition before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
280
Engine oil MOBILITY
Safety information Adding engine oil

1. Open the hood, refer to page 277.
Warning 2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-
ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Follow the instructions
on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-
ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-
ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-
rials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
3. Add engine oil.

NOTICE 4. Close the lid.
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential dam- Engine oil types to add
age. Immediately add engine oil.
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life
NOTICE of the engine.
Too much engine oil can damage the en- Only add the types of engine oil which are
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a listed.
potential damage. Do not add too much en-
gine oil. When too much engine oil is
Safety information
added, have the engine oil level corrected
by a dealer’s service center or another NOTICE
qualified service center or repair shop. Oil additives can damage the engine.
among other potential damage. Do not use
Overview oil additives.
The oil filler neck is located in the engine
compartment, refer to page 276.
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a
potential damage. When selecting an en-
gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has
the correct oil rating.
281
MOBILITY Engine oil
Suitable engine oil types Engine oil change

Add engine oils that meet the following oil
rating standards:
Gasoline engine NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
fashion can cause increased engine wear
BMW Longlife-14 FE+. and thus engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. It is recommended
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
that you do not exceed the service inter-
vals indicated in the vehicle.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an you have a dealer's service center or an-
engine oil with the following oil rating can other qualified service center or repair shop
be added: change the engine oil.
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, make sure
that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-
lowing viscosity grades:
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
More information about suitable oil ratings

and viscosity grades of engine oils can be
requested from a dealer’s service center or
shop.
282
Coolant MOBILITY
Coolant
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-
specific and optional features offered with tives can damage the engine. There is a
the series. It also describes features and risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
functions that are not necessarily available erty. Do not allow additives to come into
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-
tions or country versions. This also applies ing. Use suitable additives only.
observed. Coolant level
Checking
General information There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
Coolant consists of water and additives.
1. Let the engine cool.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi- 2. Open the hood, refer to page 277.
tives of different colors. Observe the water - 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information slightly counterclockwise to allow any
about suitable additives is available from a excess pressure to dissipate, then open
dealer’s service center or another qualified it.
service center or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling sys-
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
open the cooling system with the engine
cooled down.
283
MOBILITY Coolant
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be- Disposal

tween the minimum and maximum
marks in the filler neck.
Comply with the relevant environ-
mental protection regulations when
disposing of coolant and coolant ad-
ditives.
6. Close the lid.
Adding coolant
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 277.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any
excess pressure to dissipate, then open
it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant
up to the specified level; do not overfill.
6. Close the lid.
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
284
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options General information
Information on service notifications, refer
This chapter describes all standard, country- to page 138, can be displayed on the Control
specific and optional features offered with Display.
functions that are not necessarily available Service data in the vehicle key
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Information on the service notifications is
tions or country versions. This also applies continuously stored in the vehicle key. The
to safety-related functions and systems. service center can read this data out and
When using these functions and systems, suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi-
the applicable laws and regulations must be cle.
observed.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-
hicle key with which the vehicle was driven
most recently.
MINI maintenance system
Storage periods
The maintenance system provides service
Storage periods during which the vehicle
notifications and thereby provides support
battery was disconnected are not taken into
in maintaining road safety and the opera-
account.
tional reliability of the vehicle.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the
or another qualified service center or repair
maintenance system may vary according to
shop update the time-dependent mainte-
the country version. Replacement work,
nance procedures, such as checking brake
spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear
fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine
materials are calculated separately. Further
oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal
information is available from a dealer's serv-
filter.
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Maintenance Manual and
Condition Based Service CBS Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models
Concept and Warranty and Service
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac- Guide Booklet for Canadian
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to provide maintenance rec-
models
ommendations.
The system makes it possible to adapt the Please consult your Maintenance Manual
amount of maintenance corresponding to and Service and Warranty Information
your user profile. Booklet for US models and Warranty and
285
MOBILITY Maintenance
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Position

for additional information on the perform-
ance of service and maintenance work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that maintenance and repair be per-
formed by a service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. Records
of regular maintenance and repair work
should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diag- There is an OBD socket on the driver's side
for checking the primary components in the
nosis vehicle's emissions.
General information Emissions

Devices connected to the OBD socket trig-
ger the alarm system when the vehicle is – The warning light lights up:
locked. Remove any devices connected at Emissions are deteriorating.
the OBD socket before locking the vehicle. Have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Safety information – The warning light flashes under certain
circumstances:
NOTICE This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
tricate component intended to be used in Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
conjunction with specialized equipment to system checked immediately; otherwise,
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys- serious engine misfiring within a brief
tem. Improper use of the socket for On- period can seriously damage emission
board Diagnosis, or contact with the control components, in particular the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other catalytic converter.
than its intended purpose, can cause vehi-
cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-
sonal and property damage. Given the fore-
going, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to
a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop or other
persons that have the specialized training
and equipment for purposes of properly
utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
286
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Wiper blades
This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information
functions that are not necessarily available NOTICE
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- The window may sustain damage if the
tions or country versions. This also applies wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade
to safety-related functions and systems. installed. There is a risk of damage to
When using these functions and systems, property, among other potential damage.
the applicable laws and regulations must be Hold the wiper firmly when changing the
observed. wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the
wiper without a wiper blade installed.
Vehicle tool kit

NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age to property, among other potential
damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
hood.
The bag containing the onboard vehicle tool Replacing the front wiper blades
kit is located beneath the cargo floor panel. 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms.
After use, secure the bag with the onboard
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
287
MOBILITY Replacing components
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and swing out Except for the side flashers, all headlights
the wiper blade, arrow 2. and lights are designed in LED technology.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends that you have appropriate work per-
formed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not
been described here.
A spare light box is available from a dealer's
4. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper Follow the safety information, refer to
blade must engage audibly. page 288.
5. Fold down the wiper arm.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Rear wiper blade Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. source. These light-emitting diodes are re-
2. Pull the wiper blade out of the wiper lated to conventional lasers and are offi-
arm. cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 288.
Safety information
Warning
Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-
age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
3. Attach a new wiper blade. The wiper injury. Do not look directly into the head-
blade must engage audibly. lights or other light sources. Do not re-
4. Fold down the wiper arm. move the LED covers.
Light and bulb replacement Headlight glass

Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather.
General information When driving with the lights switched on,
the condensation evaporates after a short
Lights and bulbs time. The headlight glass does not need to
Lights and bulbs make an essential contri- be changed.
bution to vehicle safety. If despite driving with the headlights
switched on, increasing humidity forms, for
288
instance water droplets in the light, have Vehicle battery

the headlights checked.
Side turn signal, bulb replacement General information

Follow the general instructions on lights The battery is maintenance-free.
and bulbs, refer to page 288. More information about the battery can be
Bulb: WY5W. requested from a dealer's service center or
1. Push the side turn signal forward in the shop.
driving direction, arrow 1, and swing it
outward, arrow 2. Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
components that are under voltage.
Warning
2. – On the left facing the driving direc-
tion: turn the bulb holder clockwise Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
and remove. can damage vehicle systems and impair
vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-
– On the right facing the driving direc- cident and damage to property. Only vehi-
tion: turn the bulb holder counter- cle batteries that are compatible with your
clockwise and remove. vehicle type should be installed in your ve-
3. Replace the bulb. hicle. Information on compatible vehicle
4. Insert the bulb holder. batteries is available at your dealer’s serv-
ice center.
5. Insert the rear side turn signal, arrow 1,
and swing it forward, arrow 2.
Register the battery to the vehicle
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
mends that you have a service center or an-
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle
after the battery has been replaced. Once
the battery has been registered again, all
comfort features will be available without
restriction and any Check Control messages
displayed which relate to comfort features
will disappear.
289
MOBILITY Replacing components
Charging the battery – Memory function: store the positions

again.
General information – Time: update.
Make sure that the battery is always suffi- – Date: update.
ciently charged to guarantee that the bat- – Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
tery remains usable for its full service life.
A discharged battery is indicated by Disposing of old batteries
a red indicator light. Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
Charge the battery when acceleration is in- qualified service center or repair
sufficient. shop or take them to a collection point.
The following circumstances can have a Maintain the filled battery in an upright po-
negative effect on the performance of the sition for transport and storage. Secure the
battery: battery so that it does not tip over during
– Frequent short-distance drives. transport.
– The vehicle is not used for more than a
month.
Safety information
Fuses
Safety information
NOTICE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents, Warning
which means that the 12 volt electrical Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
system can be overloaded or damaged. electrical lines and components. There is a
There is a risk of damage to property, risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a
among other potential damage. Only con- blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking
nect battery chargers for the vehicle bat- fuse with a substitute of another color or
tery to the starting aid terminals in the en- amperage rating.
gine compartment.
Accessing the fuses

Charging the battery The fuses are located in the glove compart-
Charge the battery only when the engine is ment.
off and via the starting aid terminals, refer
to page 295, in the engine compartment. 1. Open the glove compartment.
Power failure
After a power loss, some equipment needs
to be newly initialized or individual settings
updated, for example:
290
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations,

as well as the positions of any other fuse
boxes, is available on the Internet:
www.mini.com/fusecard.
Where applicable, information on the fuse
types and locations is also found on a sepa-
rate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or an-
replace the fuses.
291
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Warning triangle
observed. The warning triangle is located in the tail-
gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.
Hazard warning flashers
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service
life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
The button is located above the Control Dis- Storage
play.
Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in
The red light in the button flashes when the the cargo area.
hazard warning flashers are activated.
MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept
MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted
if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
292
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
General information You can launch Teleservice Help by re-

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- questing it through the Service Specialist.
hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man- 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
ufacturer.
2. Set the parking brake.
There are various ways of making contact.
3. Control Display is switched on.
– Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 132. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
– Calling with a mobile phone. The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-
stored for specific functions.
Requirements If this is not possible, further measures will
be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-
– Active MINI Connected contract or
tance will be informed.
equipment version with intelligent
emergency call.
– Cellular network reception. Emergency Call
– The ignition is switched on.
Starting Intelligent emergency call

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, Concept
support is offered through Teleservice Diag-
nosis. In case of an emergency, an emergency call
can be triggered automatically by the sys-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): tem or manually.
1. "MINI Connected"
General information
2. "MINI Assist"
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a
The contact to the Roadside Assistance connection with the MINI Response Center.
of the manufacture is established.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Call
A telephone number is displayed, if cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
needed. Select to dial the telephone conditions.
number on a connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is
important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice
Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of
the vehicle via wireless transmission.
293
Overview The MINI Response Center then makes

contact with you and takes further steps
to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
MINI Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum-
stances.
For this purpose, data that serves to de-
termine the necessary rescue measures,
for instance the current position of the
vehicle when it can be determined, is
SOS button in the roofliner
transmitted to the MINI Response Cen-
ter.
Functional requirements If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-
– The ignition is switched on. sponse Center through the loudspeakers,
– The Assist system is functional. the hands-free system, for instance, may
be broken. However, the MINI Response
– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli- Center may still be able to hear you.
gent emergency call: the SIM card
integrated in the vehicle has been acti- The MINI Response Center ends the emer-
vated. gency call.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for instance if the
Jump-starting
airbags trigger, an emergency call is auto-
matically initiated immediately after an ac- General information
cident of corresponding severity. Automatic If the battery is discharged, the engine can
Collision Notification is not affected by be started using the battery of another vehi-
pressing the SOS button. cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper
cables with fully insulated clamp handles.
Manual triggering
1. Press the cover briefly to open it. Safety Instructions
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at
the button lights up green. DANGER
– The LED is illuminated green when an Contact with live components can lead to
emergency call has been initiated. an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
If the situation allows, wait in your vehi- ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
cle until the voice connection has been components that are under voltage.
established.
– The LED flashes green when a connec-
tion to the MINI Response Center has
been established.
294
1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-

Warning nal.
If the jumper cables are connected in the 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There tive jumper cable to the positive battery
is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor- terminal, or to the corresponding start-
rect order during connection. ing aid terminal of the vehicle providing
assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other
NOTICE end of the cable to the positive battery
In the case of body contact between the terminal, or to the corresponding start-
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during aid terminal of the vehicle to be
ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam- started.
age to property, among other potential 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-
damage. Make sure that no body contact tive jumper cable to the negative bat-
occurs. tery terminal, or to the corresponding
engine or body ground of assisting vehi-
cle.
Preparation
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
1. Check whether the battery of the other negative battery terminal, or to the cor-
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The responding engine or body ground of
voltage information can be found on the the vehicle to be started.
battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting Starting the engine
vehicle.
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
3. Switch off any electrical components in
both vehicles. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an
Starting aid terminals increased idle speed.
The starting aid terminal in the engine com- 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to
partment, refer to page 276, acts as the pos- be started in the usual way.
itive battery terminal. If the first starting attempt is not suc-
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-
ing another attempt in order to allow the
A special connection on the body in the en- discharged battery to recharge.
gine compartment, refer to page 276, acts
as the negative battery terminal. 3. Let both engines run for several mi-
nutes.
Connecting the cables 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re-
verse order.
To prevent personal injury or damage to
both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow- Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
ing procedure.
295
Tow-starting and towing Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
Safety information danger area, it can be pushed for a short
distance.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
Warning page 124.
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/ Tow truck
Steptronic transmission with

driven front axle: transporting the
vehicle
General information Your vehicle should be transported with a
tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a
The vehicle must not be towed if the front flat bed.
wheels are touching the ground.
Safety information Steptronic transmission with ALL4:

transporting the vehicle
NOTICE
General information
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
a risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Have vehicle trans- Pushing the vehicle
ported only with lifted front axle or on a To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
loading platform. danger area, it can be pushed for a short
distance.
NOTICE page 124.
The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it. Tow truck
among other potential damage. NOTICE
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means. The vehicle can become damaged when
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its lifting and securing it.
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension There is a risk of damage to property,
parts. among other potential damage.
296
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means. – When the engine is stopped, there is no
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its power assist. Consequently, more force
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension needs to be applied when braking and
parts. steering.
– Larger steering wheel movements are
required.
– The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise,
it will not be possible to control the ve-
hicle's response.
– Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
– Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km.
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform. Tow truck
Manual transmission With driven front axle
Towing or pushing the vehicle

A broken-down vehicle can be towed or
pushed.
page 121.
NOTICE
If manual unlocking of the parking brake Your vehicle should be transported with a
is not possible, the vehicle cannot be tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a
moved or towed. There is a risk of damage flat bed.
age. The vehicle should only be trans-
ported on a loading platform. With ALL4
Follow the following instructions: NOTICE

– Make sure that the ignition is switched The vehicle can be damaged when towing
on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights, the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There
turn signals, and wipers may be unavail- is a risk of damage to property, among
able. other potential damage. The vehicle should
– Do not tow the vehicle with the rear only be transported on a loading platform.
axle tilted, as the front wheels could
turn.
297
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-
ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-
low the following:
– Maneuvering capability is limited going
around corners.
Have your vehicle transported on a flatbed – The tow bar will generate lateral forces
surface only if it is secured with an offset.
Tow rope
Towing other vehicles Observe the following notes when using the
tow rope:
General information
– Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en-
Switch on the hazard warning system, de- able the vehicle to be towed without
pending on local regulations. jerking.
If the electrical system has failed, clearly – Make sure the tow rope is not twisted
identify the vehicle being towed by placing when fastening.
a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-
dow. – Check the fastening of the tow fitting
and tow rope in regular intervals.
Safety information – Do not exceed a towing speed of
30 mph/50 km/h.
Warning – Do not exceed a towing distance of
3 miles/5 km.
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle – When starting to tow the vehicle, make
to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or sure that the tow rope is taut.
it will not be possible to control the vehi-
cle's response. There is a risk of accident. Tow fitting
Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve- General information
hicle to be towed.
NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts
can occur. There is a risk of damage to
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to
the tow fitting. The screw-in tow fitting should always be
carried in the vehicle.
298
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the Press on the mark on the edge of the cover
front or rear of the vehicle. to push it out.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool
kit, refer to page 287, are together in the Tow-starting
cargo area.
Use of the tow fitting: Steptronic transmission
– Use only the tow fitting provided with Do not tow-start the vehicle.
the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due
– Use the tow fitting for towing on paved to the Steptronic transmission.
roads only. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, corrected by a dealer’s service center or an-
for instance do not lift the vehicle by the other qualified service center or repair
tow fitting. shop.
– Check the fastening of the tow fitting in
regular intervals.
Manual transmission
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
Safety information page 294. If the vehicle is equipped with a
catalytic converter, only tow-start while the
NOTICE engine is cold.
If the tow fitting is not used as intended, 1. Switch on the hazard warning system
there may be damage to the vehicle or to and comply with local regulations.
the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage 2. Switch on the ignition, refer to
to property, among other potential dam- page 104.
age. Follow the notes on using the tow fit-
ting. 3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
Screw thread for tow fitting the pedal. After the engine starts, imme-
diately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the
tow bar or tow cable, and switch off the
hazard warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified serv-
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-

cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on
the right side with respect to the direction
of travel.
299
MOBILITY Care
Care
Vehicle features and options Distances and temperature
– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Minimum distance from sensors, cam-
specific and optional features offered with eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
the series. It also describes features and – Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
functions that are not necessarily available 31.5 in/80 cm.
tions or country versions. This also applies Automatic washing systems or car
When using these functions and systems, washes
observed. Safety information
NOTICE
Washing the vehicle Improper use of automatic washing sys-
tems or car washes can cause damage to
General information the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to
Regularly remove foreign objects such as property, among other potential damage.
leaves in the area below the windshield Follow the following instructions:
when the hood is raised. – Give preference to cloth car washes
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly or those that use soft brushes in or-
in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can der to avoid paint damage.
damage the vehicle. – Do not drive through a car wash with
guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to
Steam jets or high-pressure avoid damage to the chassis.
washers – Observe the tire width of the guide
rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
Safety information – Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-
age to the exterior mirrors.
NOTICE – With rod antenna: unscrew the rod
antenna to avoid rod antenna break-
When cleaning with high-pressure wash- age.
ers, components can be damaged due to
the pressure or temperatures being too – Deactivate the wiper and, if neces-
high. There is a risk of damage to property, sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to
among other potential damage. Maintain the wiper system.
sufficient distance and do not spray too
long continuously. Follow the operating
instructions for the high-pressure washer.
300
Care MOBILITY
Driving into a car wash with a manual Vehicle care

transmission
In car washes, the vehicle must be able to Vehicle care products
roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to General information
page 121. MINI recommends using vehicle care and
cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
Driving into a car wash with a products are available from a dealer’s serv-
Steptronic transmission ice center or another qualified service cen-
In car washes, the vehicle must be able to ter or repair shop.
roll freely.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to Safety information
page 124.
Some car washes do not permit persons in Warning
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked Cleansers can contain substances that are
from the outside when in selector lever po- dangerous and harmful to your health.
sition N. A signal is sounded when an at- There is a risk of injury. When cleaning
tempt is made to lock the vehicle. the interior, open the doors or windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning
Driving out of a car wash vehicles. Follow the instructions on the
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. container.
Start the engine, refer to page 105.
Headlights Vehicle paint

Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not General information
use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
Regular care contributes to driving safety
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in- and value retention. Environmental influen-
stance from insects, with shampoo and ces in areas with elevated air pollution or
wash off with water. natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.
ice scraper. Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-
hicle care to these influences.
After washing the vehicle Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel,
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac- moved immediately to prevent the finish
tion can be reduced. The heat generated from being altered or discolored.
during braking dries brake discs and brake
pads and protects them against corrosion. Matte finish
Completely remove all residues on the win- Only use cleaning and care products suita-
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to ble for vehicles with matte finish.
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
301
MOBILITY Care
Leather care Caring for special components

Remove dust from the leather regularly, us-
ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Light-alloy wheels
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in- wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to
creased wear and premature degradation of 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or
the leather surface. steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
care roughly every two months. agents can destroy the protective layer of
adjacent components, such as the brake
Clean light-colored leather more frequently
disc.
because soiling on such surfaces is substan-
tially more visible. After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to
dry them. The heat generated during brak-
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt
ing dries brake discs and brake pads and
and grease will gradually break down the
protects them against corrosion.
protective layer of the leather surface.
Chrome surfaces
Upholstery material care
Carefully clean components such as the ra-
General information diator grille or door handles with plenty of
water, if necessary, with shampoo added,
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a particularly when they have been exposed
vacuum cleaner. to road salt.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro- Rubber components
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Environmental influences can cause surface
Clean the upholstery down to the seams us- soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.
ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing Use only water and suitable cleaning agents
the material vigorously. for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-
Safety information ber care agents at regular intervals. When
cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-
NOTICE con-containing vehicle care products in or-
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of der to avoid damage or noises.
clothing can damage the seat covers.
There is a risk of damage to property, Fine wood parts
among other potential damage. Ensure Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com-
that any Velcro® fasteners are closed. ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry
with a soft cloth.
302
Care MOBILITY
Plastic components for the vehicle and can be safely attached

to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
and do not layer several floor mats. Make
NOTICE sure that there is sufficient clearance for
Cleaning agents that contain alcohol or the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy- securely fastened again after they were re-
duty grease removers, fuel and such, can moved, for instance for cleaning.
damage plastic parts. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential Floor mats can be removed from the car's
damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth. interior for cleaning.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with
needed. a microfiber cloth and water or a textile
cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,
Clean with a microfiber cloth. rub back and forth in the direction of travel
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if only.
needed.
Do not soak the roofliner. Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
Safety belts cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass detergent.
Warning
Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of
the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries NOTICE
or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol- Chemical cleaning agents, moisture or flu-
ution for cleaning the safety belts. ids of any kind can damage the surface of
displays and screens. There is a risk of
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action damage to property, among other potential
and thus have a negative impact on safety. damage. Clean with a clean, antistatic mi-
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the crofiber cloth.
safety belts clipped into their buckles.
Safety belts should only be allowed to re-
tract if they are dry. NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged
Carpets and floor mats with improper cleaning. There is a risk of
Warning damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
the pedal distance or block a depressed Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob- cloth.
jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
cured and cannot enter into the driver's For stubborn soiling on the projection lens
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-
303
MOBILITY Care
fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-

fer to page 147.
Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer
than three months, special measures must
be taken. Further information is available
from a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
304
Care MOBILITY
305
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the values can be found in the approval docu-
Owner's Manual are used as guidance val- ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-
ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate tained from a dealer’s service center or an-
from this, for instance due to the selected other qualified service center or repair
special equipment, country version or coun- shop.
try-specific measurement method. Detailed
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can
model version, equipment or country-spe- deviate, for instance due to the selected
cific measurement method. special equipment, tires, load and chassis
The specified heights do not take into ac- version.
count attached parts, for instance a roof an-
MINI Countryman
Width with mirrors in/mm 78.8/2,001
Width without mirrors in/mm 71.7/1,822
Height in/mm 61.3/1,557
Length in/mm 169.7/4,310
Wheelbase in/mm 105.1/2,670
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 37.4/11.4
306
Technical data REFERENCE
Weights
MINI Cooper Countryman

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,376/1,985
Load lbs/kg 820/372
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,326/1,055
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,183/990
MINI Cooper S Countryman

Load lbs/kg 924/419
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,260/1,025
MINI Cooper Countryman ALL4

Load lbs/kg 805/365
MINI Cooper S Countryman ALL4

Load lbs/kg 855/388
MINI John Cooper Works Countryman ALL4

Load lbs/kg 858/389
307
REFERENCE Technical data
MINI John Cooper Works Countryman ALL4

Capacities
MINI Countryman
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 16.1/61.0
Observe further information on fuel quality,

refer to page 254.
308
Appendix REFERENCE
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the
vehicle are listed here.
Updates made after the edito-

rial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
the editorial deadline for the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
– Operation: opening and closing: vehicle
key: safety Instructions.
– Operation: opening and closing: vehicle
key: change battery: note.
– Operation: seats, mirrors and steering
wheel: seats and head restraints: safety
belts: general.
– Mobility: wheels and tires: tire pressure:
tire inflation pressure specifications: on
the door pillar.
In contrast to the description in the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle,
the MINI FindMate equipment is not availa-
ble.
309
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
ABS Antilock Braking System 182 Arrival time 144
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con- Ash tray 223
trol 128 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off
Accessories and parts 8 assistant 185
ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 187 Assistance with breakdown 292
Activated charcoal filter 215 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Activation times, parked-car ventila- Entertainment and Communication 6
tion 216 Automatic car wash 300
Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based Automatic climate control 212
cruise control 187 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 169 ror 96
Adaptive chassis 184 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-
Additives, engine oil types 281 ger airbags 160
Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa- Automatic headlight control 153
tion Display (CID) 40 Automatic locking 79
Adjustments, steering wheel 97 Automatic Recirculating Air Control 214
Airbags 158 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic
Airbags, indicator and warning light 160 transmission 121
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air Automatic unlocking 79
mode 210 AUTO program, automatic climate con-
Air conditioner 209 trol 213
air conditioning, climate 213 AUTO program, intensity 214
Air distribution, manual 210, 215 Auto Start/Stop function 107
Air drying, see air conditioning 213 Average consumption 143
Air flow, air conditioner 210 Average speed 143
Air flow, automatic climate control 214 Axle loads, approved 307
Air outlets, see Ventilation 215
Air pressure, tires 256 B
Alarm system 79
Alarm triggering 79 Backrest curvature, see Lumbar sup-
Alarm, unintentional 81 port 87, 88
ALL4 184 Backrest, seats 86
All-season tires, see Winter tires 264 Bad road trips 244
All-wheel drive, see ALL4 184 Battery, disposing of 290
Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46 Battery, vehicle 289
Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 119 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-
Antilock Braking System ABS 182 ing 296
Anti-slip control, see DSC 182 Belts, see Safety belts 90
310
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Beverage holder, see Cup holders 230 Carpet, care 303

Blocking, power window, see Safety Car wash 300
switch 83 Car wash, automatic 300
Bluetooth connection 53 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas
Bonus range, GREEN Mode 248 system 241
Bottle holder, see Cup holders 230 CBS Condition Based Service 285
Brake assistant 182 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Brake discs, break-in 240 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Brake pads, break-in 240 Center armrest 230
Braking, information 242 Center console 34
Breakdown assistance 292 Central Information Display (CID) 36
Breaking in 240 Central Information Display (CID), see Con-
Brightness, Control Display 49 trol Display 38
Bulb replacement 288 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 146
Bulb replacement, side 289 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-
Bulbs and lights 288 side 68
Buttons on the steering wheel 32 Central screen, see Control Display 38
Button, SOS 293 Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Button, Start/Stop 104 Safety 7
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 294 Changing parts 287
Changing wheels 270
C Changing, wheels and tires 263
Charging smartphone, see Wireless charg-
California Proposition 65 Warning 8 ing tray 225
Calling up mirror adjustment 78 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wire-
Calling up seat adjustment 78 less charging tray 225
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel- Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
ligent Safety 169 number 13
Camera-based cruise control 187 Check Control 132
Camera lenses, care 303 Check engine oil level 279
Camera, rearview camera 200 Checking the engine oil level electroni-
Can holder, see Cup holders 230 cally 279
Care 300 Checking the oil level electronically 279
Care, light-alloy wheels 302 Children, seating position 98
Care of displays, screens 303 Children, transporting safely 98
Care, vehicle 301 Child restraint system 98
Cargo area 232 Child restraint system LATCH 101
Cargo area, adapting size 236 Child restraint systems, mounting 99
Cargo area, enlarging 234 Child safety locks 103
Cargo area lid 72 Child seat, mounting 99
Cargo area, seating surface 238 Child seats 98
Cargo area, storage compartments 234 Chrome parts, care 302
Cargo cover 233 Cigarette lighter 223
Cargo position, rear seat backrest 234 Cleaning displays, screens 303
Cargo, stowing and securing 232 Clearance, water 242
Cargo straps 233 Climate control 209, 212
311
Clothes hooks 231 Cruise control with distance control, see

Coasting 249 Camera-based cruise control 187
Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast- Cruise control without distance control, see
ing 249 Cruise control 194
Coasting with idling engine 249 Cruising range 138
Combination switch, see Turn signals 112 Cup holder 230
Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys- Current consumption 138
tem 112, 116 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for
Comfort Access 68 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Compartments in the doors 230 tion 6
Compass 221
Compatible devices, see Suitable devi- D
ces 53
Computer, see Trip computer 142 Damage, tires 262
Condensation on windows 211, 215 Dashboard 32
Condensation under the vehicle 243 Data memory 10
Condition Based Service CBS 285 Data protection, settings 51
Configuring driving program 185 Data, see Deleting personal data 51
Confirmation signal 79 Data, technical 306
Connect device 52 Date 48
Connecting electrical devices, see Sock- Date, display 138
ets 223 Daytime running lights 154
Connections 52 DCC, see Cruise control 194
Consumption, see Average consump- Defrosting, see Windows, defrost-
tion 143 ing 211, 215
Consumption, see Current consump- Deleting personal data 51
tion 138 Departure schedule, see Pre-ventila-
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- tion 216
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Destination distance 144
Continued driving with a flat tire 165, 168 Device list 52
Control Display 38 Digital clock 137
Control Display, brightness 49 Digital compass 221
Controller 39 Dimensions 306
Control systems, driving stability 182 Dimmable exterior mirrors 96
Convenient closing, vehicle key 64 Dimmable interior mirror 97
Convenient opening, vehicle key 63 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 112
Cooling, maximum 213 Display, date 138
Cornering light 154 Display, electronic, instrument clus-
Corrosion on brake discs 243 ter 131, 132
Cosmetic mirror 223 Display, engine temperature 143
Country timer 150 Display, GREEN Mode 246
Coupling, see Pairing 52 Display, iDrive 36
Courtesy lights during unlocking 63 Display lighting, see Instrument light-
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 64 ing 156
Cruise control 194 Displays 129
Cruise control, active 187 Disposal, coolant 284
312
Disposal, vehicle battery 290 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see

Distance control, see PDC 197 DSC 182
Distance to destination 144 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
Divided screen view, split screen 38 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Drive-off assistant 185 Emergency braking, see PostCrash -
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 182 iBrake 181
Driver assistance, see Intelligent Emergency Request 293
Safety 169 Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-
Driver profiles 75 sistance 292
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 77 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 253
Driver profiles, importing profiles 77 Emergency unlocking, transmission
Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv- lock 127
ing Modes switch 184 Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see
Driving Excitement, SPORT 145 Emergency wheel 274
Driving instructions, breaking in 240 Energy control 138
Driving mode, GREEN 246 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 107
Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy- Engine compartment 276
sis 251 Engine coolant 283
Driving modes 184 Engine idling when driving, see Coast-
Driving notes, general 241 ing 249
Driving notes, things to remember when Engine oil 279
driving 240 Engine oil, adding 280
Driving on bad roads 244 Engine oil change 282
Driving on racetracks 244 Engine oil filler neck 280
Driving stability control systems 182 Engine oil types to add 281
Driving, Start/Stop button 104 Engine start, see Jump-starting 294
Driving style analysis 251 Engine start, see Starting the engine 105
Driving through water 242 Engine stop 106
Driving tip, GREEN tip 248 Engine temperature, display 143
Driving tips 241 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 182 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 183 munication 6
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav- Entering an address, navigation, see Own-
igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas- and Communication 6
sis 184 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 182 igation, Entertainment and Communica-
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 183 tion 6
Equipment, interior 218
E Error displays, see Check Control 132
ESP Electronic Stability Program, see
Easy Opener 70 DSC 182
Electronic displays, instrument clus- Exchanging, wheels and tires 263
ter 131, 132 Exhaust gas system 241
Electronic oil measurement 279 Exhaustion warner 180
Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 241
313
Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni- Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator

tor 96 light 161
Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea- Front seats 86
ture 96 Fuel 254
Exterior mirrors 95 Fuel cap 252
Exterior mirrors, malfunction 96 Fuel filler flap 252
External start, see Jump-starting 294 Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 253
External temperature display 137 Fuel gauge 136
External temperature warning 137 Fuel quality 254
Eyes for securing cargo 233 Fuel recommendation 254
Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 308
F Fuse 290
Failure message, see Check Control 132 G

False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional
alarms 81 Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-
Fan, see Air flow 210, 214 sal Remote Control 218
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 90 Gasoline 254
Fatigue alert 180 Gear shift indicator 139
Filler neck for engine oil 280 General driving notes 241
Filter, see Microfilter 211 General settings 48
Fine wood, care 302 Glare shield 223
First-aid kit 292 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 85
Fish, MINIMALISM display 251 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-
Flat tire, changing wheels 270 roof 83
Flat tire, continued driving 165, 168 Glove compartment 229
Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 167 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49
Flat tire message, FTM 167 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Flat tire message, TPM 163 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Flat Tire Monitor TPM 167 tion 6
Flat tire, repairing 265 GREEN bonus range 248
Flat tire, warning light 163, 167 GREEN Mode 246
Flooding, driving through 242 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 184
Floor carpet, care 303 GREEN tip, driving tip 248
Floor mats, care 303 Gross vehicle weight, approved 307
Fold-away position, windshield wip- Ground clearance 243
ers 115, 118
Foot brake 242 H
Forward Collision Warning with collision
mitigation 170 Handbrake, electric, see Parking brake,
For Your Own Safety 7 electric 110
Front airbags 158 Hand-held transmitter, alternating
Front fog lights 155 code 219
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de-
activation 160
314
Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook Identification number, see Vehicle identifi-
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- cation number 13
cation 6 Ignition off 104
Hazard warning flashers 292 Ignition on 104
Head airbag 159 Illuminated ring, central instrument clus-
Headlight control, automatic 153 ter 146
Headlight flasher 112 Indicator and warning lights, see Check
Headlight glass 288 Control 132
Headlights, care 301 Indicator light, front-seat passenger air-
Head restraints and seats 86 bags 161
Head restraints, front 92 Indicator light, see Check Control 132
Head restraints, rear 93 Individual air distribution 210, 215
Head-up Display 147 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 75
Head-up Display, shift point indicator 150 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wire-
Head-up Display, sport displays 149 less charging tray 225
Head-up Display, standard view 148 Inflation pressure, tires 256
Head-up Display, store position, see Mem- Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 167
ory function 94 Info Display 131
Heated steering wheel 97 Information 6
Heavy cargo, stowing 232 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 167
Height, vehicle 306 Input, iDrive 36
High-beam Assistant 154 Instrument cluster 129
High beams 112 Instrument cluster, electronic dis-
High beams/low beams, see High-beam As- plays 131, 132
sistant 154 Instrument lighting 156
Hills 242 Integrated key 67
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis- Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
tant 185 cle 60
Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 230 Integrated Universal Remote Control 218
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Intelligent emergency call 293
Control 218 Intelligent Safety 169
Homepage, see Internet 6 Intended use 8
Hood 277 Intensity, AUTO program 214
Horn 32 Interior equipment 218
Hot exhaust gas system 241 Interior lights 156
HUD Head-up Display 147 Interior lights during unlocking 63
Hydroplaning 241 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 64
Interior mirror 95
I Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
ture 97
iBrake - PostCrash 181 Interior mirror, compass 221
Ice warning, see External temperature Interior mirror, manually dimmable 96
warning 137 Interior motion sensor 81
Icy roads, see External temperature warn- Interval display, service notifications 138
ing 137 Interval mode 113, 117
Identification marks, tires 260 In the vicinity of the center console 34
315
In the vicinity of the roofliner 35 Loading 232

Loading position 234
J Loading the cargo area, see Stowing
cargo 232
Jacking points for the vehicle jack 272 Location, vehicle position 49
Jam protection system, glass sunroof 85 Locking, automatic 79
Jam protection system, windows 82 Locking, from inside 68
Jump-starting 294 Locking, settings 78
Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-
sistant 154
K Low beams, operation 152
Lower back support, see Lumbar sup-
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 68 port 87, 88
Key, see Integrated key 67 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
Key, see Vehicle key 62 rack 243
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 124 Lumbar support 87, 88
Knee airbag 159
M
L
Maintenance 285
Label on recommended tires 264 Maintenance recommendations, see Condi-
Lane departure warning 176 tion Based Service CBS 285
Lane threshold, warning 176 Maintenance, service notifications 138
Language, set 48 Maintenance system, MINI 285
Lashing eyes 233 Make-up mirror 223
LATCH child restraint fixing system 101 Malfunction displays, see Check Con-
Launch Control 128 trol 132
Leather care 302 Manual air flow 210
LED ring, central instrument cluster 146 Manual brake, electric, see Parking brake,
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 288 electric 110
Length, vehicle 306 Manual control, air distribution 210, 215
Letters and numbers, entering 37 Manual control, air flow 214
Light-alloy wheels, care 302 Manual mode, transmission 125
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 288 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-
Lighter 223 trol 198
Lighting 152 Manual operation, rearview camera 201
Light replacement 288 Manual Speed Limiter 178
Light replacement, side 289 Manual transmission 120
Lights 152 Manufacturer of the MINI 7
Lights and bulbs 288 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
Light switch 152 igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 178 Matt paint, care 301
List, instrument cluster, see Selection Maximum cooling 213
lists 141 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit
List of all messages 50 Info 140
Load 233 Maximum speed, winter tires 264
316
Measuring units 49 N
Mechanical key 67
Media of the Owner's Manual 60 Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 292 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Memory function 94 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints
Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection front 92
lists 141 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints
Menus, Central Information Display rear 93
(CID) 40 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels,
Messages 50 care 302
Messages, see Check Control 132 New wheels and tires 263
Microfilter 211, 215 Notifications 50
MID - program, driving dynamics 184 No-touch closing of the tailgate 70
MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for No-touch opening of the tailgate 70
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6
MINI driving modes 184 O
MINI logo projection during unlocking 63
MINI maintenance system 285 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 286
MINIMALISM analyzer 251 OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 286
MINIMALISM information 249 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 202
Minimum tread, tires 262 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
MINI Picnic Bench 238 grade 255
MINI Roadside Assistance 292 Odometer 137
Mirrors 95 Oil 279
Mobile communication devices in the vehi- Oil, adding 280
cle 241 Oil change 282
Mobile phone, connecting 52 Oil filler neck 280
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Oil service interval, service notifica-
gation, Entertainment and Communica- tions 138
tion 6 Oil types to add, engine 281
Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis- Onboard literature, printed 60
tance 292 Onboard vehicle tool kit 287
Mobility System 266 On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own tance 292
Safety 7 Opening and closing 62
Moisture in headlight 288 Opening, from inside 68
Monitor, see Control Display 38 Operating concept Central Information Dis-
Mounting of child restraint systems 99 play (CID) operating concept 36
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Operating menus, Central Information Dis-
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 play (CID) 36
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Operation via the Controller 40
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Operation via touchscreen 42
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Operation via voice 44
Optional equipment, see Vehicle equip-
ment 7
317
Outside air, see Automatic Recirculating Protective function, windows, see Jam pro-
Air Control 214 tection system 82
Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor- Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 39
age 304
Owner's Manual, printed 60 R
P Racetrack operation 244
Radio-ready state 105
Paint, car care 301 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Pair device 52 Entertainment and Communication 6
Panic alarm, see Panic mode 80 Rain sensor 113, 117
Panic mode 80 Ratchet straps 233
Panoramic glass sunroof 83 Rear seat backrests, folding down 234
Parallel parking assistant 203 Rear seats 89
Park Distance Control PDC 197 Rearview camera 200
Parked vehicle, condensation 243 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 95
Parking aid, see PDC 197 Rear window defroster 211, 215
Parking assistant 203 Rear window wiper, operation 114, 118
Parking brake, electric 110 Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/acti-
Parking lights 152 vated-charcoal filter 215
Parts and accessories 8 Recirculated-air mode 210
Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, Recommended fuel grade 255
see Automatic Curb Monitor 96 Recommended tire brands 264
Pathway lighting 153 Refueling 252
Pathway lines, rearview camera 201 Remaining range 138
Payload, technical data 307 Remote control, universal 218
PDC Park Distance Control 197 Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand-
Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Col- book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
lision Mitigation 174 munication 6
Performance Control 184 Replacing parts 287
Personal data, deleting 51 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 65
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 75 Replacing, wheels and tires 263
Phone, connecting 52 Reporting safety malfunctions 14
Picnic Bench 238 RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise con-
Plastic, care 303 trol 187
PostCrash - iBrake 181 RES CNCL button, cruise control 194
Power failure 290 Reserve warning, see Range 138
Power windows 81 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 163
Pressure, tires 256 Retreaded tires 264
Pre-ventilation 216 Roadside parking lights 153
Printed onboard literature 60 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 219
Profiles, see Driver profiles 75 RON recommended fuel grade 255
Programmable memory buttons, Central In- Roofliner 35
formation Display (CID) 43 Roof-mounted luggage rack 243
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam
protection system 85
318
Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 150
for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi- Side airbag 158
cation 6 Signaling, horn 32
RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- Signals when unlocking 79
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Sitting safely 86
Rubber components, care 302 Slide/tilt glass roof 83
Run-flat tire 265 Smallest turning circle, vehicle 306
Smartphone, connecting 52
S Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-
gation, Entertainment and Communica-
Safe braking 242 tion 6
Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 286
front passenger seat 92 Sockets, electrical devices 223
Safety belts 90 Software update 58
Safety belts, care 303 Software, updating 58
Safety locks, doors, and windows 103 SOS button 293
Safety switch, windows 83 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for
Safety systems, see Airbags 158 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Saving fuel 245 tion 6
Screen, see Control Display 38 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 274
Screwdriver 287 Speech recognition 44
Sealant, see Mobility System 266 Speed Limit Device, see Speed Limiter 178
Seat heating, front 89 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit
Seating position for children 98 Info 140
Seats and head restraints 86 Speed Limiter 178
Seats, front 86 Speed Limit Info 140
Seats, rear 89 Speed Limit Info, trip computer 144
Securing, cargo 232 Speed limit, see Speed Limiter 178
Selection list in the instrument cluster 141 Speed, see Average speed 143
Sensors, care 303 Speed warning 146
Service and warranty 9 Split screen 38
Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis- Sport displays 145
tance 292 Sport displays, Head-up Display 149
Service notifications, display 138 SPORT program, driving dynamics 185
Service notifications, see Condition Based Sport program, transmission 125
Service CBS 285 Stability control systems 182
Servotronic 186 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equip-
SET button, camera-based cruise con- ment 7
trol 187 Standard view, Head-up Display 148
SET button, cruise control 194 Stars, MINIMALISM display 251
Setting, Control Display 49 Start/stop, automatic function 107
Settings, general 48 Start/Stop button 104
Settings, locking/unlocking 78 Starting the engine 105
Settings, mirrors 95 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook
Settings, seats and head restraints 86 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 126 cation 6
319
Status control display, tires 162 Technical changes, see For Your Own
Status information, Central Information Dis- Safety 7
play (CID) 37 Technical data 306
Status of Owner's Manual 7 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Status, vehicle 151 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Steering assistance 186 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for
Steering column adjustment 97 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Steering wheel, adjusting 97 tion 6
Steering wheel, buttons 32 Temperature, air conditioner 209
Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step- Temperature, automatic climate con-
tronic transmission 121 trol 212
Steptronic Sport transmission with double Temperature display for external tempera-
clutch, see Steptronic transmission 121 ture 137
Steptronic transmission 121 Temperature, engine 143
Steptronic transmission with double clutch, Terminal, starting aid 295
see Steptronic transmission 121 Text message, Check Control 136
Stopping the engine 106 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 79
Storage compartments 229 Thigh support 89
Storage, tires 265 Third-party provider, voice assistant 46
Store Mirror position, see Memory func- Tilt alarm sensor 81
tion 94 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror,
Store seat position, see Memory func- see Automatic Curb Monitor 96
tion 94 Time 48
Storing the vehicle 304 Time of arrival 144
Stowing, cargo 232 Tire brands, recommended 264
Suitable devices 53 Tire chains 270
Suitable mobile phones 53 Tire damage 262
Summer tires, tread 262 Tire identification marks 260
Sun visor 223 Tire inflation pressure 256
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60 Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see
Supplementary text message 136 TPM 167
Switches, see Dashboard 32 Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 167
Switch for driving dynamics 184 Tire pressure 256
Symbols 6 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 162
Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 266
T Tires 256
Tires, changing 263
Tachometer 137 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 266
Tailgate 72 Tires, run-flat 265
Tailgate, closing with no-touch activa- Tire tread 262
tion 70 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Tailgate, opening with no-touch activa- Entertainment and Communication 6
tion 70 Tools 287
Tailgate via vehicle key 64 Touchscreen 42
Tank capacity 308 Towing 296
Tow-starting 296
320
TPM Flat Tire Monitor 167 V

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 162
Traction control 183 Vanity mirror 223
TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control, Vehicle battery 289
DTC 183 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis-
Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for tance 292
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Vehicle, breaking in 240
tion 6 Vehicle care 301
Transmission lock, electronic unlock- Vehicle care products 301
ing 127 Vehicle equipment 7
Transmission lock, releasing manually 127 Vehicle identification number 13
Transmission, manual transmission 120 Vehicle jack 272
Transmission, see Steptronic transmis- Vehicle key, additional 65
sion 121 Vehicle key, loss 65
Transporting children safely 98 Vehicle key, malfunction 66
Travel computer 144 Vehicle key, opening/closing 62
Tread, tires 262 Vehicle key, replacing the battery 65
Trip computer 142 Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 62
Triple turn signal activation 112 Vehicle paint, care 301
Trip odometer 137 Vehicle position, vehicle location 49
Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 137 Vehicle status 151
Trunk, see Cargo area 232 Vehicle storage 304
Turning circle, vehicle 306 Vehicle washing 300
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 201 Ventilation 215
Turn signal, indicator light 135 Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 216
Turn signal, side 289 Venting, see Ventilation 215
Turn signals, operation 112 Vent, see Ventilation 215
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13
U Voice assistant, third-party provider 46
Voice command response 44
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 81 Voice control 44
Units, see Measuring units 49 Voice control system 44
Universal remote control 218
Unlocking, automatic 79 W
Unlocking, settings 78
Unpaved roads, cross-country trips 244 Warning and indicator lights, see Check
Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Control 132
Updating, software 58 Warning displays, see Check Control 132
Upholstery care 302 Warning messages, see Check Control 132
Upper retaining strap, top tether 102 Warning triangle 292
USB connection 55 Warranty 8
USB port, position in vehicle 224 Washer fluid 119
Used battery, disposing of 290 Washer nozzles, windshield 114, 118
Use, intended 8 Washer system 112, 116
Using a smartphone via voice control 46 Washing the vehicle 300
321
Washing, vehicle 300

Water on roads 242
Website 6
Weights 307
Welcome lights 153
Welcome lights during unlocking 63
Wheel base, vehicle 306
Wheels 256
Wheels, changing 263
Width, vehicle 306
Windows, powered 81
Windshield defroster 211, 215
Windshield washer fluid, see Washer
fluid 119
Windshield washer nozzles 114, 118
Windshield wiper, see Wiper sys-
tem 112, 116
Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-
tion 115, 118
Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor-
age 304
Winter tires, suitable tires 264
Winter tires, tread 262
Wiper blades, replacing 287
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 119
Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 112, 116
Wiper system 112, 116
Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wire-
less charging tray 225
Wireless charging tray for smart-
phones 225
Wood, care 302
Word match concept, navigation 37
Working in, engine compartment 277
Wrench 287
322
01405A2C389 ue
*BL5A2C38900X*
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
01405A2C389 ue
*BL5A2C38900X*

MINI F60 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MINI F60 Owners Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Icon Meaning This also applies to safety-related functions

Icons on vehicle components Updates made after the editorial

Intended use If work is performed improperly, for in-

an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit Event Data Recorder EDR

Vehicle identification number

The engraved vehicle identification number

Right nameplate The vehicle identification number can be

The vehicle identification number can be

Windshield other information about motor vehicle

For Canadian customers

Reporting safety defects

Buttons for the central locking

Unlocking the vehicle Locking

Comfort Access Opening and closing the tailgate with

On the driver's or front passenger's door

Locking the vehicle Tailgate

On the driver's or front passenger's door

With automatic tailgate: Opening In the vicinity of the steering

– Unlock the vehicle and press the button

Without automatic tailgate: Closing

Press the button on the inside of the tail-

All around the selector lever Button Function

Goes to destination input menu

Set-up and use

– To raise: push the head restraint up.

Electrically adjustable seats

Adjusting the steering wheel Press the desired button 1 or 2.

3. Press the button. The LED in the Navigation destination input

3. "State/Province?" 5. Select the functions for which the mo-

Pairing the mobile phone Accepting a call

Dialing a number Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

1. Press the button.

Apple CarPlay preparation

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Manual transmission: switching off

Start/stop engine Set the electrical parking brake

Manual transmission Steptronic transmission, Sport and

Selector lever lock

High beams, headlight flasher Icon Function

Automatic headlight control.

Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– Rain sensor: position 1. Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

Switching off and brief wipe

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Activating/deactivating Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system

To activate: press the lever up once from its

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

Switching off and brief wipe

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Air recirculation mode.

Button Function Button Function

Controls the air distribution

Maximum cooling. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

Automatic air recirculation Gasoline

Defrosts and defogs the